34-60-22 UNS 1E 1C+ Tech Manual

UNS-1E
Super Flight Management System
UNS-1C+
Flight Management System
Technical Manual
The information contained herein is subject to Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”),

15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
This publication is available at www.uasc.com.
©2001, 2012 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
3260 East Universal Way

Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
•
(520) 295-2300 (800) 321-5253 34-60-22 1 May 2012
UNS–1E & UNS-1C+ Flight Management System Technical Manual
Record of Revisions
Rev. No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials
0riginal 7 May 2001 7 May 2001 UASC
1 1 May 2012 1 May 2012 UASC
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages
according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date,
insertion date and your initials.
Page 1
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Record of Temporary Changes

Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
1 19 Feb 2013 19 Feb 2013 / UASC
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change.
Page 1
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change.
Page 2
34-60-22 1 May 2012
List of Effective Pages

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
Title Page 1 May 2012 108 1 May 2012

109 1 May 2012
Record of Revisions 1 1 May 2012 110 1 May 2012
111 1 May 2012
Record of Temporary 1 1 May 2012 112 1 May 2012
Changes 2 1 May 2012 113 1 May 2012
114 1 May 2012
List of Effective Pages 1 1 May 2012 115 1 May 2012
2 1 May 2012 116 1 May 2012
3 1 May 2012 117 1 May 2012
118 1 May 2012
Table of Contents 1 1 May 2012 119 1 May 2012
2 1 May 2012 120 1 May 2012
3 1 May 2012 121 1 May 2012
4 1 May 2012 122 1 May 2012
5 1 May 2012 123 1 May 2012
6 1 May 2012 124 1 May 2012
125 1 May 2012
Introduction 1 1 May 2012 126 1 May 2012
2 1 May 2012 127 1 May 2012
128 1 May 2012
Description and 1 1 May 2012 129 1 May 2012
Operation 2 1 May 2012
3 1 May 2012 Equipment 201 1 May 2012
4 1 May 2012 Specifications 202 1 May 2012
5 1 May 2012 203 1 May 2012
6 1 May 2012 204 1 May 2012
7 1 May 2012 205 1 May 2012
8 1 May 2012 206 1 May 2012
9 1 May 2012 207 1 May 2012
10 1 May 2012 208 1 May 2012
11 1 May 2012 209 1 May 2012
12 1 May 2012 210 1 May 2012
13 1 May 2012 211 1 May 2012
14 1 May 2012 212 1 May 2012
15 1 May 2012 213 1 May 2012
16 1 May 2012 214 1 May 2012
17 1 May 2012 215 1 May 2012
18 1 May 2012 216 1 May 2012
19 1 May 2012 217 1 May 2012
20 1 May 2012 218 1 May 2012
21 1 May 2012 219 1 May 2012
22 1 May 2012 220 1 May 2012
221 1 May 2012
FAA Approval 101 1 May 2012 222 1 May 2012
102 1 May 2012 223 1 May 2012
103 1 May 2012 224 1 May 2012
104 1 May 2012 225 1 May 2012
105 1 May 2012 226 1 May 2012
106 1 May 2012 227 1 May 2012
107 1 May 2012 228 1 May 2012
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1 MayPage

2012
1
SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
229 1 May 2012 350 1 May 2012

230 1 May 2012 351 1 May 2012
231 1 May 2012 352 1 May 2012
232 1 May 2012 353 1 May 2012
354 1 May 2012
Installation And Wiring 301 1 May 2012 355 1 May 2012
302 1 May 2012 356 1 May 2012
303 1 May 2012 357 1 May 2012
304 1 May 2012 358 1 May 2012
305 1 May 2012 359 1 May 2012
306 1 May 2012 360 1 May 2012
307 1 May 2012 361 1 May 2012
308 1 May 2012 362 1 May 2012
309 1 May 2012 363 1 May 2012
310 1 May 2012 364 1 May 2012
311 1 May 2012 365 1 May 2012
312 1 May 2012 366 1 May 2012
313 1 May 2012 367 1 May 2012
314 1 May 2012 368 1 May 2012
315 1 May 2012 369 1 May 2012
316 1 May 2012 370 1 May 2012
317 1 May 2012 371 1 May 2012
318 1 May 2012 372 1 May 2012
319 1 May 2012 373 1 May 2012
320 1 May 2012 374 1 May 2012
321 1 May 2012 375 1 May 2012
322 1 May 2012 376 1 May 2012
323 1 May 2012 377 1 May 2012
324 1 May 2012 378 1 May 2012
325 1 May 2012 379 1 May 2012
326 1 May 2012 380 1 May 2012
327 1 May 2012 381 1 May 2012
328 1 May 2012 382 1 May 2012
329 1 May 2012
330 1 May 2012 System Data 401 1 May 2012
331 1 May 2012 Installation
332 1 May 2012
333 1 May 2012 Maintenance, 501 1 May 2012
334 1 May 2012 Checkout, and 502 1 May 2012
335 1 May 2012 Troubleshooting 503 1 May 2012
336 1 May 2012 504 1 May 2012
337 1 May 2012 505 1 May 2012
338 1 May 2012 506 1 May 2012
339 1 May 2012 507 1 May 2012
340 1 May 2012 508 1 May 2012
341 1 May 2012 509 1 May 2012
342 1 May 2012 510 1 May 2012
343 1 May 2012 511 1 May 2012
344 1 May 2012 512 1 May 2012
345 1 May 2012 513 1 May 2012
346 1 May 2012 514 1 May 2012
347 1 May 2012 515 1 May 2012
348 1 May 2012 516 1 May 2012
349 1 May 2012

2012
2
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
517 1 May 2012

518 1 May 2012
519 1 May 2012
520 1 May 2012
521 1 May 2012
522 1 May 2012
523 1 May 2012
524 1 May 2012
525 1 May 2012
526 1 May 2012
527 1 May 2012
528 1 May 2012
529 1 May 2012
530 1 May 2012
531 1 May 2012
532 1 May 2012
533 1 May 2012
534 1 May 2012
535 1 May 2012
536 1 May 2012
537 1 May 2012
538 1 May 2012
539 1 May 2012
540 1 May 2012
541 1 May 2012
Navigation Systems 601 1 May 2012
Fuel Flow Inputs 701 1 May 2012

2012
3
Table of Contents
Record of Revisions ........................................................................................................1
Record of Temporary Revisions .....................................................................................1
List of Effective Pages ....................................................................................................1
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................1
Introduction .....................................................................................................................1
Makeup and Use of This Manual ..................................................................................................... 1
Application................................................................................................................................. 1
Organization............................................................................................................................... 1
Abbreviations and Terminology ...................................................................................................... 2
Contact Information ......................................................................................................................... 2
Description and Operation ..............................................................................................1
Description ....................................................................................................................................... 1
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1
Single FMS Installation Description .......................................................................................... 4
Dual FMS Installation Description ............................................................................................ 5
System Components .................................................................................................................. 6
System Interfaces ....................................................................................................................... 9
FMS Components .................................................................................................................... 12
Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 15
General ..................................................................................................................................... 15
Configuration Module.............................................................................................................. 19
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) ................................................................................................ 19
Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) ................................................................................ 19
EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) .......................................................................................................... 22
FAA Approval ............................................................................................................ 101
General ......................................................................................................................................... 101
Applicable TSOs .................................................................................................................... 101
Applicable Advisory Circulars and Other References ........................................................... 101
Reference Documents ............................................................................................................ 102
GPS TSO C129a Class A1, B1 and C1 Considerations ........................................................ 103
Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness .................................................................................. 105
Environmental Qualification Forms ............................................................................................ 105
Page 1
CONTENTS 1 May 2012
UNS-1C+ FMS ...................................................................................................................... 106
UNS-1E FMS ......................................................................................................................... 107
Configuration Module............................................................................................................ 108
4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (1117-XX)............................................................... 109
4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4) ........................... 110
4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6) ........................... 111
5-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (1018-X-XXX without Mod 9 or Mod 11) ............. 112
5-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (1018-X-XX3 with Mod 9) ..................................... 113
5-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (1018-X-XX3 with Mod 11) ................................... 114
Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) .............................................................................. 115
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) .............................................................................................. 116
GPS/GNSS Antenna .............................................................................................................. 117
GPS Antenna.......................................................................................................................... 118
Sample Airplane Flight Manual ................................................................................................... 119
Equipment Specifications ........................................................................................... 201
Equipment Identification ............................................................................................................. 201
UNS-1E & UNS-1C+ FMS Equipment ................................................................................. 201
Compatible Peripheral Equipment ......................................................................................... 201
Technical Manuals ................................................................................................................. 202
UNS-1E FMS Part Number Matrix ....................................................................................... 203
UNS-1C+ FMS Part Number Matrix ..................................................................................... 204
Configuration Module Part Number Matrix .......................................................................... 204
5-Inch FPCDU Part Number Matrix ...................................................................................... 205
4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-XX) Part Number Matrix ............................................................ 205
4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX) Part Number Matrix ..................................................... 205
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Part Number Matrix ............................................................. 206
Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100) Part Number Matrix ............................................ 206
Solid State Data Transfer Unit Part Number Matrix ............................................................. 206
Portable Solid State Data Transfer Unit Part Number Matrix ............................................... 206
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ FMS Part Number Descriptions ...................................................... 207
Power Specifications.................................................................................................................... 209
Equipment Specifications ............................................................................................................ 210
UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ FMS ....................................................................................................... 210
5-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 210
4-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 211
Page 2
CONTENTS 1 May 2012
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) .............................................................................................. 211
SSDTU ................................................................................................................................... 211
Portable SSDTU .................................................................................................................... 212
GPS/GNSS Antenna .............................................................................................................. 213
GPS Antenna.......................................................................................................................... 214
Installation Kits ............................................................................................................................ 215
FMS Installation Kit .............................................................................................................. 215
4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit ............................................................................ 215
DTU-100 Installation Kit ....................................................................................................... 216
Portable DTU-100 Installation Kit......................................................................................... 216
SSDTU Installation Kit .......................................................................................................... 217
Portable SSDTU Installation Kit ........................................................................................... 217
GPS Antenna Installation Kit ................................................................................................ 218
Required Tools ............................................................................................................................. 219
Crimping Tools Required ...................................................................................................... 219
Pin Insertion/Extraction Tools Required ............................................................................... 219
Wire and Cable Manufacturers .................................................................................................... 219
Equipment Drawings ................................................................................................................... 220
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+.......................................................................................................... 220
Configuration Module Installation ......................................................................................... 222
5-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 223
4-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 225
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................ 229
SSDTU ................................................................................................................................... 230
ERP ........................................................................................................................................ 231
GPS/GNSS and GPS Antenna ............................................................................................... 232
Installation and Wiring............................................................................................... 301
General ......................................................................................................................................... 301
Form – Dimensions and Communications............................................................................. 301
Sensor/Equipment Compatibility/Selection ........................................................................... 301
Digital Input Compatible Sensors and Equipment................................................................. 307
Digital Output Compatible Sensors and Equipment .............................................................. 309
Analog Inputs ......................................................................................................................... 312
Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 314
FMS Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................................... 315
Page 3
CONTENTS 1 May 2012
Electrical Connectors ............................................................................................................. 316
Remote Annunciators ............................................................................................................ 316
FMS Installation Considerations ........................................................................................... 316
GPS/GNSS Antenna Mounting ............................................................................................. 316
Solid State Data Transfer Unit ............................................................................................... 319
FMS Interfaces ............................................................................................................................. 321
Analog Inputs ......................................................................................................................... 321
Discrete Inputs ....................................................................................................................... 322
Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................... 323
Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 326
Discrete Outputs .................................................................................................................... 327
Digital Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 328
ARINC Sensors Mutual Exclusion ........................................................................................ 330
Pin Assignment ............................................................................................................................ 332
Digital Configuration UNS-1C+ and UNS-1E ...................................................................... 332
Analog Configuration UNS-1C+ and UNS-1E...................................................................... 335
Dual ARINC Configuration UNS-1C+ and UNS-1E ............................................................ 338
ASCB Configuration UNS-1C+ and UNS-1E ....................................................................... 341
5-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 344
4-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 345
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................ 347
SSDTU ................................................................................................................................... 348
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ Wiring ................................................................................................... 349
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ All Configurations........................................................................... 350
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ All Digital Configurations .............................................................. 361
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ Standard AC Pitch Configuration ................................................... 364
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ Dual ARINC Board Configuration ................................................. 368
UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ ASCB Board Configuration ............................................................ 372
Internal GPS Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 376
Multiple FMSs and FPCDU .................................................................................................. 377
Falcon 2000/Astra SPX Dual FMS ........................................................................................ 378
System Data Installation ............................................................................................. 401
Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting ........................................................... 501
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 501
Checkout ...................................................................................................................................... 501
Page 4
CONTENTS 1 May 2012
CDU/FMS Self-Test .............................................................................................................. 502
CDU Keyboard Dimming and Display Offset ....................................................................... 505
FMS Configuration Verification ............................................................................................ 505
Static Test .............................................................................................................................. 506
Interface Tests .............................................................................................................................. 508
HSI ......................................................................................................................................... 508
Winds Display (EFIS Only) ................................................................................................... 508
DME Interface ....................................................................................................................... 508
VOR (without RRS) .............................................................................................................. 509
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................ 509
SSDTU ................................................................................................................................... 510
Approach Mode ..................................................................................................................... 511
Sensors Checkout ......................................................................................................................... 512
IRS ......................................................................................................................................... 512
GPIRS .................................................................................................................................... 512
LORAN C .............................................................................................................................. 513
GPS/GNSS-1 ......................................................................................................................... 513
UASC Radio Reference Sensor ............................................................................................. 513
Air Data.................................................................................................................................. 513
Fuel Flow ............................................................................................................................... 514
GPIRS Checkout .................................................................................................................... 514
UASC GPS ............................................................................................................................ 519
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 526
Self-Test ................................................................................................................................. 527
System Failure Messages ....................................................................................................... 528
Database Update Error Messages .......................................................................................... 537
Configuration Verification ..................................................................................................... 538
FMS Self-Test Output ............................................................................................................ 539
FMS Output to HSI ................................................................................................................ 539
DIST/GS ................................................................................................................................ 539
HSI From ............................................................................................................................... 539
DIST/BRG ............................................................................................................................. 539
Roll Steering .......................................................................................................................... 540
Input and Selected Crosstrack ................................................................................................ 540
DME....................................................................................................................................... 540
Winds Display........................................................................................................................ 540
Sensors ................................................................................................................................... 541
Page 5
CONTENTS 1 May 2012
Navigation Systems .................................................................................................... 601
Fuel Flow Inputs ......................................................................................................... 701
Page 6
CONTENTS 1 May 2012
UNS-1E & UNS-1C+ Flight Management System Technical Manual
Introduction
1. Makeup and Use of This Manual
A. Application
This Technical Manual for the UNS-1E System and UNS-1C+ is applicable to the
components and software control numbers (SCN) noted below. The SCN is stamped on the
component Data Plate.
This Technical Manual is used for installation and basic wiring. Refer to the FMS Interface
Manual, Report No. 34-60-27 for wiring diagrams covering specific installations. Refer to the
FMS Configuration Manual, Report No. 34-60-26, for detailed FMS/MMMS software
configuration instructions.
UNS-1E Flight Management System, P/N 2017-XX-XXX
UNS-1C+ Flight Management System, P/N 10172-XX-XXX
Configuration Module, P/N 10171
5-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (FPCDU), P/N 1018-X-XXX
4-Inch FPCDU, P/N 1117-XX, 1117-X-XXX
Solid State Data Transfer Unit, SSDTU, P/Ns 1408-00-X, 1409-00-2
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100, Iomega ZIP Drive), P/N 1406-01-X, 1407-01-1
The following table shows the allowable combinations of UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ Flight
Management System (FMS) part numbers and SCNs:
Software Control Software Control
UNS-1E FMS Numbers UNS-1C+ FMS Numbers
PART No. PART No.
80X 90X 80X 90X
2017-0X-XXX 10172-0X-XXX
2017-3X-XXX 10172-3X-XXX
2017-4X-XXX 10172-4X-XXX
2017-5X-XXX 10172-5X-XXX
NOTE: Refer to the UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ part number matrix in the Equipment
Specifications section for a detailed explanation of the information contained in the
part numbers.
B. Organization
This Technical Manual provides the information about:
(1) Description and operation of the components of the UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ FMS.
(2) FAA Approval including Environmental Qualification Forms.
(3) Equipment Specifications to support selection of compatible peripherals and planning
for the installation of UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ components.
(4) Detailed installation and wiring requirements.
34-60-22 1 MayPage
2012
1
(5) Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting procedures for the UNS-1E and UNS-
1C+ and peripheral sensors as well as outputs from the UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ to the
Flight Guidance System.
(6) Navigation Sensors - where to find scheduled outages and current status of long-range
navigation systems.
(7) Fuel Flow Inputs to the UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ for various sensors.
2. Abbreviations and Terminology
This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations throughout
the industry. However, the use of 80X.X and 90X.X are used to indicate passages that are
applicable to one or more, but not all SCNs. Some of the components have multiple names
that are used interchangeably. The terms FMS, UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ are used to refer to
the FMS [80X.X] and the MMMS [90X.X].
The terms FPCDU and CDU are used to refer to the 5-Inch Flat Panel CDU, P/N 1018-X-
XXX and the 4-Inch Flat Panel CDU, P/N 1117-XX or 1117-X-XXX. Part numbers refer to
specific configurations of a component.
The terms GPS and GPS/GNSS are used interchangeably in this manual. The UNS-1E, P/N
2017-XX-XXX, is only equipped with a GPS/GNSS receiver, whereas the UNS-1C+, P/N
10172-XX-XXX may be equipped with either a GPS or a GPS/GNSS receiver.
The front panel of the FMS contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used to operate
the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name, for example [ENTER],
[A], etc.
Throughout this manual reference is made to the "DTU-100" and "disk". The term “disk”
used herein now refers to any of the data storage devices (Zip disk, USB or SD) and the term
“DTU” will be used to refer to either the DTU-100 or SSDTU.
Procedures in this manual and displayed on the FMS will still use the term “DISK” and will
remain unchanged regardless of the data storage device being used.
3. Contact Information
Please submit comments, suggestions, errors or other concerns about this manual to our
Technical Publications Department at techpubs@uasc.com.
To order copies or request changes in address and distribution information, contact
info@uasc.com.
For technical questions, please contact customersupport@uasc.com.
34-60-22 1 MayPage
2012
2
UNS–1E & UNS–1C+ Flight Management System Technical Manual
Description and Operation

1. Description
The information contained within this installation manual describes the administrative and
technical aspects, features, functions, and components of Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation’s (UASC) Flight Management System (FMS) and Multi-mission Management
System (MMMS). All comments or recommendations regarding the installation, acceptance
or operation of the FMS/MMMS or its accessories and components can be directed to the
Product Support Department at Universal Avionics Systems Corporation.
The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a
reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein
do not represent any specific STC or Form 337 aircraft installation. It is the installer’s
responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the
drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC or
Form 337 drawing package.
A. General
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s FMS and MMMS are fully integrated navigation
systems designed to provide the pilot with centralized control of the aircraft navigation
sensors, lateral and vertical flight guidance and steering, fuel management, database
management and flight planning.
The basic FMS consists of a flat panel, full color, high-resolution display, alphanumeric
function keys, line select keys, a GPS sensor and a master computer, all housed in a single,
cockpit/pedestal Dzus-mounted box.
NOTE: The use and interface compatibility of specific systems/equipment depends upon
the FMS Part Number, and the specific Software Control Number (SCN)
incorporated in the FMS, as described and annotated throughout this manual.
Throughout this manual we use the term “FMS” to refer to the UNS-1E and UNS-
1C+ as well as the Multi-Mission Management System. The exception to this
would be if we were required to be product, part number or multi-mission specific.
The FMS accepts position information from up to five long-range navigation sensors as well
as a scanning DME, VOR, or TACAN sensor. The data from these sensors is used to
determine the best computed position. This position is used by the FMS for navigating the
aircraft along the programmed flight plan. Flight plans are created using the navigation
database. The database locates waypoints along an entered route and then combines these
waypoints to form a flight plan.
Current capability includes lateral great circle and vertical navigational guidance and display,
from aircraft departure to arrival. This includes enroute as well as terminal and approach
capabilities that are integrated with real time fuel management monitoring data. An
incorporated Radar/Multi-Function Display (MFD) interface allows selection and display of
flight plan waypoints on compatible weather radar or MFD displays.
Page 1
34-60-22 1 May 2012
The computed and raw sensor data are output for display on the FMS display. Flight
guidance system installations, switching and pilot annunciations are streamlined, as all output
data comes from one source, the FMS, which represents all sensors.
Each type of navigation sensor has unique capabilities and functions. The type and number of
sensors can be tailored to optimize for specific operational requirements using Loran C
(LCS), GPS, GNSS, Doppler and laser- or gyro-referenced inertial navigation sensors. VOR
and TACAN receivers are optional for either enroute navigation or as an approach reference.
The system also accepts data from a Radio Reference Sensor (RRS) in lieu of
DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. The FMS also has the ability to tune and receive data from
communication and navigation radios. The user may tune commands to COM (3), NAV (2),
ADF (2), ATC, or TAC radios depending on the configuration.
The FMS receives true airspeed (TAS) and altitude information from an air data computer.
The system supports only digital air data inputs. The FMS receives fuel flow data from the
aircraft fuel flow sensors, and optionally, heading data from an analog gyro.
The fuel management function of the FMS accepts input from the aircraft fuel flow sensors
as well as information supplied by the pilot. It uses this data to continuously update and
display fuel management information during flight. It also assists the pilot in planning fuel
requirements while on the ground.
The FMS contains six databases: navigation, company route, checklists, performance,
pilot-defined, and FMS flight plan. All databases can be updated via a Data Transfer Unit
(DTU). This DTU is housed within a protective case that may be panel mounted in the
cockpit for convenient access. The FMS will have the ability to store two cycles of the
Navigation and Company Routes databases.
A self-contained worldwide NAV database stored in non-volatile memory provides the FMS
with information on over 100,000 waypoints, navaids, airports, and over 12,000 SIDs,
STARs and approaches. The operator may choose from a worldwide database with airports of
>2000 foot or >4000 foot runways. A special Eastern Region Helicopter (ERHC) database
exists for helicopter operators.
The pilot-defined database is stored in nonvolatile memory. It has the capacity to store up to
200 pilot-defined enroute waypoints, 200 pilot-defined routes and 100 each pilot-defined
enroute alignment points, airport reference points, runways, and approaches. The system will
store 100 average-size, pilot-entered SIDs and STARs as well. The FMS flight plan database
is erased when the FMS is turned off.
The FMS supports the checklist function as an external FMS in the Collins ProLine 4 800
avionics system. The user generates the checklist data on a personal computer (PC) program,
loads it into the FMS, and maintains it. The checklist database and the status information on
the active checklist reside in nonvolatile memory. Aircraft configured for the advanced
performance feature require an aircraft specific database that contains the data pertinent to
their operation.
Page 2
34-60-22 1 May 2012
The FMS employs an Ethernet connection for rapid transfer of data to such systems as the
Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) and Application Server Unit (ASU). The
Ethernet also provides 10 MB per second database loading from a Data Transfer Unit.
The FMS is configured to its specific aircraft installation by the use of Configuration
Module. At the time of installation, the Configuration Module is programmed through CDU
inputs to completely define the sensor input ports, fuel flow type, air data type, etc.
Page 3
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. Single FMS Installation Description
The FMS computes its position and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments and provides sensor control to all sensors. The FMS houses its internal
databases. These include charted data from suppliers such as Jeppesen and pilot input data
such as routes and approaches.
NOTE: The block diagram illustrates the various types of inputs and outputs to and from
the FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is
dependent on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
Video
Vision-1
TAWS
Cabin Display
ASU or UCD
GPS
Antenna UniLink
Internal UniVision
GPS
FGS Display
Configuration
Module Air Data
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9 AFIS
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
OF
/N
F
O P Q R S T DIM
Fuel Flow
U V W X Y Z ENTER
GPS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
TACAN
VOR
DME
UNIVERSAL RRS
DTU-100 or SSDTU
Page 4
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Dual FMS Installation Description
In dual installations, each FMS communicates with the other, sharing flight plan and
navigational information. Typically, in dual FMS installations, all long-range navigation
sensors are interfaced with both units. Each FMS computes an independent position using all
available navigational sensors and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments. Each FMS shares its best best-computed position with the other system and
continuously monitors the other system's position output.
Each FMS houses its own internal databases. These include charted data from suppliers such
as Jeppesen and pilot input data such as routes and approaches.
NOTE: The block diagram shows the various types of inputs and outputs to and from the
FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is dependent
on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
Video
Vision-1
TAWS
Cabin Display
ASU or UCD
UniLink GPS
GPS Antenna
Antenna UniVision
FGS Internal
Internal GPS
GPS
Configuration
Configuration Display Module
Module
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6 FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
Air Data A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
O P Q R S T
OF
/N
F
DIM AFIS O P Q R S T
OF
/N
F
DIM
U V W X Y Z ENTER U V W X Y Z ENTER
Fuel Flow
GPS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
TACAN
VOR
DME
RRS
UNIVERSAL
DTU-100 or SSDTU
Page 5
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. System Components
The basic UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ installation consists of the FMS (containing the display,
keypad, navigation computer and a GPS/GNSS sensor), configuration module, Data Transfer
Unit and GPS/GNSS antenna.
(1) Display
The FMS utilizes a 5-inch active matrix liquid crystal flat panel display. The high
resolution display provides alphanumeric characters, icons and graphics capabilities
to facilitate on–screen data recognition. The display allows for data display on eleven
lines with 24 characters each in two different sizes. Graphic displays for special
photo, search and surveillance flight patterns are provided. External video sensors can
also be displayed if the FMS contains the optional video feature.
(2) Keypad
The full alphanumeric keypad also contains dedicated function keys and, when used
in conjunction with the ten line select keys (LSK), provides the operator with all the
controls necessary to communicate with the internal navigation computer and all
associated sensors. The keypad allows manual data entry, system mode selection and
control (selection and deselection) of navigation sensors.
(3) Navigation Computer
The FMS contains the system’s powerful central processing unit (nav computer),
navigation sensor interface circuits, flight guidance system interface and the Jeppesen
database. The unit processes data from DME, TACAN, VOR, Air data, Fuel Flow
and up to five long-range navigation sensors. A radar joystick input can also be
accommodated. At installation, the system is configured with the number and type of
long range navigation sensors which will optimize the FMS to the aircraft’s specific
requirements. The long-range Nav sensors act in addition to the multi-channel
scanning DME and VOR sensing capability integrated into the basic circuit.
The FMS is available in different sensor compatibility configurations with five
optional fuel flow configurations. These are analog (ac or dc), digital (pulse or
frequency), and ARINC 429 digital. It also incorporates an Ethernet connection for
transfer of data to Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) and Universal
Cockpit Display (UCD) as well as future systems.
(4) Configuration Module, P/N 10171
The configuration module is a serially connected EEPROM designed to store
configuration data that is specific to the aircraft installation, The EEPROM is
attached to the FMS mounting rack. The user is able to view and initialize the aircraft
configuration through specially designed menus that can be accessed through the
keypad. Subsequent modifications to the configuration are possible but restricted
through software interlocks. The Configuration Module receives and transmits data to
the FMS via private serial communications busses.
Page 6
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100), P/N 1406–( ), 1407–( )
The Data Transfer Unit (DTU–100) is an IOMEGA ZIP drive housed within a
protective case. Model 1406 may be panel mounted in the cockpit for convenient
access. Model 1407 consists of a DTU-100, housed in a portable carrying case. The
wire harness plugs into sockets mounted in the aircraft that are wired to the FMS. The
DTU-100 is used to update the standard and expanded navigation databases within
minutes. The update is contained on a Zip disk that is distributed periodically to
subscribers. Database updates are loaded into the FMS over a 10base-T Ethernet
connection from the DTU-100. The DTU-100 receives power from the FMS and
communicates directly with it through a digital bus.
The DTU-100 is also used to load aircraft specific performance data. The DTU-100
may also load pilot–defined flight plans and checklists created with off–line flight
planning software loaded into an IBM compatible computer. FMS in-flight data
parameters can be written to a disk utilizing the DTU-100. The Maintenance Log
stored in non–volatile memory also may be written to a disk.
(6) Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-( ), 1409-( )
The SSDTU is designed to replace the DTU-100 as a data upload and download
device interfacing with other Universal Avionics’ line replaceable units (LRU). The
SSDTU replaces the IOMEGA ZIP disk technology with flash memory technology.
Two accessible data storage device ports are built into the faceplate of the SSDTU.
These ports support Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Secure Digital (SD) data storage
devices and function as disk drives. The SSDTU transfers data files between the
selected data storage device and other LRUs using an Ethernet bus.
The SSDTU has three serial digital buses that are each capable of receiving and
transmitting data. The first is a single EIA-485 (RS-422) bus which can be used to
exchange data between FMSs. The second is an Ethernet bus, which consists of an
eight port Ethernet switch used to exchange data with up to eight UASC Ethernet
network compatible LRUs such as the FMS, TAWS and Vision-1 systems. The
transfer rate to the client is the same or better than a DTU-100. The third is an EIA-
232 bus that provides access to the diagnostic interface.
The SSDTU is available in two models, the fixed installation model that is
permanently installed in the aircraft and the portable model which is carried into the
aircraft, attached to an interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed
prior to flight. The SSDTU is the same fit as a DTU-100, although using USB and SD
data storage devices allows more flexibility for SSDTU installations.
The functions of the discrete inputs that were used to enable or disable Ethernet or
EIA-485 data bus communications in the DTU-100 have been disabled in the
SSDTU. The functions are now enabled by software.
Page 7
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(7) EFIS Radar Panel, P/N 1015–1–XX (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 Installations only)
The EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) provides two knobs with push buttons and six buttons
for pilot control of various EFIS and RADAR functions of the Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics System. The ERP also receives pilot inputs from the Pro Line 4 Altitude
Awareness Panel (AAP) and the Pro Line 4 Course Heading Panel (CHP). All
pilot/user inputs are forwarded to the FMS navigation computer via a CSDB
interface. The FMS/ERP combination replaces the Collins CDU. The FMS becomes
the navigation control or External Navigator.
Page 8
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. System Interfaces
(1) Inputs
The FMS has eight standard and eight optional ARINC input ports that can be
configured as either HS 429, LS 429, 571 or 575. Other digital and analog inputs for
systems interfacing are also accommodated. Listed below are the sensor types that can
be interfaced with the FMS. The following information is of a general nature. (For
more detailed information on specific compatible sensors and interfacing data, refer
to the Installation and Wiring section of this manual.)
(a) Up to five long-range navigation sensors:
• Loran-C Sensor System (LCS) – maximum of one
• GPS/GNSS Sensor – Three, including the internal GPS/GNSS sensor
• Doppler
• Inertial Reference (Sensor) System (IRS or ISS or IRGPS) – maximum of
three of the same type, configured in any order or combination
(b) Radar “joystick” input for waypoint definition–maximum of two if one is
ARINC and the other is CSDB.
(c) One Air Data Computer input (either ARINC 429 or 575).
(d) Radio Reference Sensor (RRS) – one.
NOTE: RRS is used in lieu of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. An RRS and
Radio Tune Unit (RTU) can be installed on the same aircraft. In this
case, the RRS is used for radio navigational inputs, and the RTU for
pilot command tuning of radios. If an RRS is used, a separate
TACAN receiver (listed below) is not normally installed.
(e) Short Range Navigation Radios – the system is capable of receiving and using
inputs from multiple short-range navigation radio sensors as follows:
• ARINC 429 DME – maximum of one
• ARINC 429 VOR – maximum of one
• ARINC 429 TACAN, AN/ARN–118 – maximum of one
• CSDB Only (RS-422) DME – maximum of one
• CSDB Only (RS-422) VOR – maximum of one
NOTE: Either ARINC 429 or Collins CSDB interface may be used for the
short range navigation radios, but not both. CSDB (RS–422) is
preferred since this type of interface is in addition to the 16 ARINC
429 input ports described above. (Interconnection of ARINC 429
type radios requires adherence to acceptable system input
configurations detailed in the Installation and Wiring section of this
manual.)
Page 9
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(f) Engine Fuel Flow Inputs–maximum of four of the same type, i.e., dc, ac,
pulse, or frequency. The FMS also accepts ARINC digital fuel flow inputs.
(g) Flight Guidance and Flight Control Systems–interfacing inputs/outputs
provided in both digital and analog formats.
(h) AFIS (Global Airborne Flight Information System)–fully supported
(i) Collins ProLine 4 Avionics System
(j) GLS 1250 interface (SCN 801/901 and subsequent)
(k) Honeywell Primus
(l) UniLink is fully supported
(m) TAWS Display
(2) Outputs
Analog as well as digital outputs to the Flight Guidance System and roll steering to
the Flight Control System are available. In addition, digital/analog outputs are
available for flight instrumentation systems (both electronic and mechanical)
equipment. Remote annunciators and other discrete outputs are also provided. Listed
below are standard outputs available from the FMS.
(a) Analog
• Pitch and Roll Steering
• Desired Track (Synchro/Resolver)
• Bearing to Waypoint/Drift Angle (Synchro/Resolver)
• Lateral Deviation
• Vertical Deviation
• TO/FROM
• Flags and Valids
(b) Digital
• ARINC 429 High Speed Output Data Bus – Two isolated outputs
• ARINC 429 Low Speed Output Data Bus – Two isolated outputs
• ARINC 429 Tune 1 Output Bus – One isolated output
• Tune 2 Output Bus – One isolated output
• ARINC 429 Output Bus (Spare) – Two isolated outputs
• ARINC 561 Output Data Bus – Standard
• ARINC 571 Output Data Bus – Standard
• RS–422 Output Data Bus – Collins CSDB for DME/Radio Tuning
functions
Page 10
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(c) Annunciators
• Message
• Selected Crosstrack
• FMS Approach Mode
• Waypoint
• FMS Heading Mode
• GPS INTEG
• Dead Reckoning
• Vertical Waypoint Annunciation
(3) Internal Database
Each FMS has the internal storage capability of more than 100,000 locations. This
data is supplied on a Zip disk shipped directly from Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation on a 28 day revision cycle. This database is retained in non–volatile flash
RAM which allows nearly instant access time in aircraft database loading. To load
each revision cycle, a Data Transfer Unit is required.
This database will normally contain data for the following:
• Airports
• Navaids
• ILS
• Enroute Waypoints
• Terminal Waypoints
• NDB Navaids
• LOW and HIGH Altitude Airways
• Plain language VOR & NDB names
• Plain language AIRPORT names
• SIDs and STARs
• Approaches
• Runways
Page 11
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. FMS Components
(1) CPU
• Motorola Power PC 509 microprocessor running at 25 MHz
• 16 Mbytes Flash EEPROM memory for program storage
• 32 Mbytes Flash EEPROM memory for database storage
• 2 Mbytes EEPROM for bootstrap program
• 4 Mbytes battery backed static RAM
• 2 Kbytes Serial EPROM for internal Configuration Module
• Battery backed real time clock device for system time keeping and timer interrupt
generation
• One discrete output signal and one bidirectional discrete signal for
communication with external Configuration Module
• One TTL level serial port for communication with the front panel display
• Two RS–232 communications ports (One of these ports does not leave the CPU
board and is used for download of software via a remote computer while the other
port is used for connection to a remote terminal.)
• One 10base-T Ethernet port for communications with the System-1 local area
network
• Thirteen discrete input signals and eleven discrete output signals
• 28 V input bus power failure detection signal connected to the processor’s non-
maskable interrupt
• One JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) port that contains 128 bytes of serial
EEPROM with the Ethernet MAC address for the LAN
• One analog to digital converter which is 8 bits and has a full scale value of 5V
• One set of system configuration jumpers (comprised of 16 individual jumpers)
(2) Auxiliary Circuit Board
• Two CSDB transmitters and four receivers
• 128 K by 16 Flash EEPROM for program storage
• 4 K by 16 of dual Port RAM for communication with the main processor
• Four pulse/analog fuel flow inputs
• Input signals for analog heading
NOTE: The four differential fuel flow inputs incorporated in the Auxiliary board
allow, in an all-digital aircraft, the elimination of the analog board. The
fuel flow multiplexer switches these inputs to a RMS converter, a
counter, or an A/D converted depending on the type of input. Analog
Heading is located on the Auxiliary board to allow an all-digital aircraft
access to this variable without an Analog board. The Roll Steering
command is under control of the CPU Power PC509 microprocessor
even though it is located on the Auxiliary board.
Page 12
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) ARINC Circuit Board
• Eight differential ARINC 429 receivers
• Four differential ARINC 429 transmitters
• Facilitates a three-GPS system
NOTE: The ARINC circuit board facilitates a three-GPS system through the
following modifications: ARINC Transmit port 2 is jumpered to provide
input to GPS Receiver 1. ARINC Transmit port 2 must be configured as
LS 429 when the internal GPS is installed to provide three sources of the
ARINC Transmit 2 signal for triple FMS installations. ARINC Receive
port 0 is jumpered to receive input from the internal GPS transmitter.
ARINC Receive port 0 must be configured with GPS when the internal
GPS is installed.
NOTE: The ARINC circuit board facilitates provisional UniLink support with
the following modifications: ARINC Transmit port 0 is jumpered to
provide input to the UniLink HS Receive port. ARINC Receive port 1 is
jumpered to receive its input from the UniLink Transmit port. ARINC
Receive 1 port must be configured with UniLink when the UniLink
board is installed.
(3) Second ARINC Circuit Board (Optional)

• Eight differential ARINC 429 receivers
• Four differential ARINC 429 transmitters
(4) Analog Circuit Board
The Analog circuit board communicates with the CPU through dual port memory. All
processing is accomplished using an on-board 68332 processor. The Analog circuit
board is available with or without high-level deviation. This particular hardware
modification allows the voltage scaling of the deviation output to be revised. D/A
converters are used to generate the following analog outputs:
• Crosstrack
• Vertical Deviation (0–2 VDC, 7.5 VDC Flag Stow)
• TO/From
• Pitch Command
D/A converters are used to generate the following synchro outputs:
• Bearing X
• Bearing Y
• Desired Track X
• Desired Track Y
NOTE: Both Bearing Z and Desired Track Z are output at ground potential.
Page 13
34-60-22 1 May 2012
A discrete latch is used to implement the following 28V / Open discrete outputs:
• Pitch Valid
• NAV Valid
• Digital Valid
• Vertical Deviation Valid
(5) GPS or GNSS RAIM Circuit Board
The GPS circuit board processor is a 68332. The processor controls all
communications with the internal GPS receiver (Ashtech Sensor II), perform integrity
monitoring and control external communications with the FMS. The GNSS processor
is a Motorola MPC 509, including a built-in floating point unit, operating at 25 MHz.
The processor controls all communications with the internal GPS/GNSS receiver
(Ashtech GG12), perform integrity monitoring and control the external
communications with the FMS. The GPS RAIM board incorporates the following:
• One ARINC 429 output
• Three ARINC 429 inputs
NOTE: The GPS or GNSS RAIM circuit board facilitates a GPS/GNSS system
by the following modifications: GPS Receiver 1 is jumpered to receive
input from ARINC Transmit port 2 which must be configured with the
LS 429 bus when the internal GPS board is installed.
The internal GPS transmitter is jumpered to provide input to ARINC
Receive port 0 which must be configured with a GPS sensor when the
internal GPS is installed. For non-internal GPS installations the GPS
transmitter pins are reserved as “No Connect” to prevent dual inputs to
ARINC receive port 0.
(6) ASCB-A Board
When configured, the ASCB-A provides an interface to aircraft equipped with ASCB
Version A.
(7) Power Supply
The Power Supply converts 28 VDC aircraft power to +5 VDC, +15 VDC and –15
VDC for FMS circuitry and the Configuration Module. The Power Supply also
provides output voltage monitoring and current limiting and power fail warning for
orderly computer shut down.
(8) Display Board
Display board configurations vary according to options available in your particular
FMS.
Page 14
34-60-22 1 May 2012
2. Operation
A. General
Detailed operating procedures for are provided in the Operator’s Manual for the specific
software loaded into your FMS, for example, SCN 80X.X or 90X.X. The operating
procedures presented here are intended to provide you the information you will need to
perform tasks later in this manual.
The FMS Operator’s Manuals introduces the FMS, explains the operating philosophy, and
provides a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys and their associated functions.
The FMS provides the operator with all the controls necessary to communicate with the
navigation computer and associated navigation sensors. Line select keys (LSK) are located on
either side of the display. In this manual we refer to individual line select keys as [1L]
through [5L] and [1R] through [5R] as illustrated. Function keys are immediately below the
display and an alphanumeric keypad is below and to the right of the function keys. The
display provides for manual data entry, system mode selection, computed and raw data
displays control (selection and deselection) of navigational sensors and system message
displays.
The FMS may be used to tune the aircraft radios when a Radio Tuning Unit (RTU) is
installed, when the aircraft is configured with Collins Pro Line4, Honeywell Primus or when
an AN/ARN–118 TACAN is installed or when a 709 DME and a 711 VOR are installed.
The following paragraphs provide general information about operator–FMS interface that is
applicable to installation and checkout of the FMS.
(1) System Power Up
The [ON/OFF-DIM] key provides power-up, display dimming and unit shutdown
functions.
Pushing the [ON/OFF-DIM] key for initial power-up will energize the system and
initiate self-test of the navigation computer. When self-test is initiated, the Self-test
page will appear. The Self-Test page will automatically be followed by the
Initialization page if all tests are successfully completed. If a failure that would cause
the system to be unusable occurs, the Initialization page will not appear. Once the
Initialization page appears, no other page can be displayed until the initialization data
is accepted.
(2) Cursor
Data is always entered into the system at a cursor location. The cursor marks variable
parameters by means of reverse field.
When appropriate, the cursor location aligns with one of the ten line select keys used
to control the cursor. The home position of the cursor is usually off the display when
a page is initially accessed, although some pages have a cursor default position that is
on the screen. Pushing the ENTER key completes the entry of data. If there is a
logical next field for data entry, the cursor will automatically advance to this next
field when [ENTER] is pushed.
Page 15
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Item Selection
OPT LIST 1/ 1
select
#-
1 no sensor
2 dc linear
3 ac linear
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Selections are made with the line select keys whenever possible. In some cases a
combination of line select keys and reference numbers are used on the same display
page. This allows two levels of selection to exist simultaneously on the same display
page. For example, while the content or nature of a list is controlled by the line select
keys, an item from that list can be selected by using a reference number. In this
illustration (OPT LIST 1/1) the reference numbers appear to the left of the items
available for selection. The cursor is on the dash in the data entry field next to the
pound (#) sign. To make a selection, enter the number corresponding to your choice
and push [ENTER]. The arrow next to the word RETURN points to the adjacent line
select key [5R]. Pushing [5R] will return the display to the previous page.
Any selection that will change the active flight plan, guidance of the aircraft, or the
stored database requires confirmation. Confirmation is accomplished by pushing the
line select key a second time or by pushing [ENTER]. Selection of fields that do not
require confirmation will cause the page or mode change to occur immediately when
the corresponding line select key is pushed.
(4) Information Display
Color and graphics are used to draw attention to the most important items on a
display. Background colors and/or boxes are used to group data into important areas
such as control or selection boxes.
Page 16
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) Dimming Control
BRIGHT®
DIM®
CANCEL®
DISPLAY®
OFF/STBY®
After the system is turned on, pushing [ON/OFF DIM] will cause a control window to
be displayed on the right side of the active page with the options BRIGHT, DIM,
CANCEL, OFFSET, and OFF. Pushing the line select key next to one of these
options selects the option.
BRIGHT – Pushing the line select key for BRIGHT will cause the display to brighten
slowly as the key is held down until reaching maximum brightness.
DIM – Pushing the line select key for DIM will cause the display to dim slowly as the
key is held down until reaching minimum brightness.
CANCEL – Pushing the line select key for CANCEL will cause the control window
to be removed from the active display page.
OFFSET – Pushing the line select key for offset will cause the parallax adjustment
window to be displayed.
OFF/STBY – Pushing LSK [5R] OFF/STBY displays the CONFIRM OFF/STBY
page. This page has two options (CONFIRM OFF and CANCEL) selectable using the
line select keys. Selecting CONFIRM OFF will turn the system off. Selecting
CANCEL will return the display to the Power/Display Control page.
Page 17
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(6) Parallax Adjustment
UP®
DOWN®
CANCEL®
The parallax adjustment window presents three options (UP, DOWN, and CANCEL)
selectable using the line select keys.
UP – Pushing the line select key for UP will cause the entire display to shift upwards
by as much as one–half character to adjust the parallax for the line select keys.
DOWN – Pushing the line select key for DOWN will adjust the display downwards
by as much as one–half character to adjust the parallax for the line select keys.
CANCEL – Pushing the line select key for CANCEL will return the display to the
dimming control window.
(7) Confirm Off
CONFIRM®
OFF
CANCEL®
CONFIRM
STANDBY®
This page has three options (CONFIRM OFF, CANCEL and CONFIRM STANDBY)
selectable using the line select keys.
• CONFIRM OFF – Pushing LSK [1R] CONFIRM OFF turns the system off.
• CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL returns the display to the
Power/Display Control page.
• CONFIRM STANDBY – Pushing LSK [5R] CONFIRM STANDBY allows the
FMS to be powered up with position information intact. This is a configurable
feature.
Page 18
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. Configuration Module, P/N 10171
The Configuration Module has no controls or displays of its own.
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100)
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the DTU (Models
1406 and 1407). Refer to your Operator’s Manual applicable to your Flight Management
System and software program version for detailed operating procedures. When using the
Portable DTU, connect the DTU cable to the appropriate panel-mounted connectors before
turning the unit on.
(1) Power
With external power applied to the DTU-100, the red LED illuminates.
(2) Disk Insertion and Removal
• Open the Dust Cover by pulling out and upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and
latch mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover in the fully open position.
• Insert the disk into the drive. Push on the exposed edge of disk until it is fully
inserted.
• Push the eject button on the disc drive to remove the disk.
• Grasp the disk and pull it out of the drive.
• Push the dust cover toward the unit until it snaps closed.
D. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the SSDTU, models
1408-( ) and 1409-( ). Refer to the Operator’s Manual applicable to the Flight Management
System and software version for detailed operating procedures.
(1) Power
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU, connect the SSDTU cable to the
appropriate panel-mounted connectors before applying power to the aircraft.
When power is applied, the SSDTU undergoes a Lamp Test and Power-on Built-In-
Test (PBIT). The SSDTU operates the front panel LED indicators in the following
order.
(a) All LEDs Off: Power supply not present.
(b) All LEDs Amber: Power supply good, processor initializing.
(c) All LEDs Green: Loading and verifying the operating system image and
verifying the file system image.
(d) All LEDs Blue: Initializing operating system.
Page 19
34-60-22 1 May 2012
During PBIT, all three indicators will display the same status at any given time. The
purpose of the operation is to test the LEDs and to give a clear indication of which
PBIT step failed, should the SSDTU fail to begin normal operation.
Following PBIT (normal operation), the SSDTU operates the front panel LED
indicators as shown in the following table.
Indicator Color and Action
Indicator
Type Blank Green Green Amber Blue Blue
Solid Blinking Solid Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self-Test N/A
(Front) detected an
error
(SSDTU will
reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
Storage
Device)
SD No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
Storage
Device)
NET Not yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) operational
Ethernet No device A network Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present link is activity
established
on this port
(2) Flash Memory

(a) Insertion
• Open the Dust Cover by pulling upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and
• Insert the flash memory card. Push on the exposed edge until it is fully
inserted, the memory card will remain seated all the way in the slot when
pressure is released.
NOTE: If the card does not slide into the slot easily, do not try to force
it; the card will not fit in backwards. Turn the card around 180º
and reinsert card.
• Close the dust cover.
Page 20
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(b) Removal of Data Storage Device
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the
read operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during
a write operation, the device may become corrupt and will require
the data storage device to be formatted on a personal computer (not
an FMS format command which only deletes files from the media).
• Push on the exposed edge of the memory card, release pressure and the
memory card will eject slightly out of the slot.
• Grasp the edge of the flash memory and pull it out of the SSDTU.
• Close the dust cover.
(3) USB Memory Insertion
(a) Insertion
• Insert USB memory all the way into the USB slot until seated.
NOTE: If the USB Memory does not slide into the slot easily, do not
try to force it; the card will not fit in backwards. Turn the
memory card around 180º and reinsert.
NOTE: Do not close dust cover.
(b) Removal
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the
read operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during
a write operation, the device may become corrupt and will require
the data storage device to be formatted on a personal computer (not
an FMS format command which only deletes files from the media).
• Pull USB Memory card straight out of memory slot.
• Close dust cover.
Page 21
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015–1–X (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 Installations Only)
The supplement to the FMS Operator’s Manual introduces the ERP and provides a detailed
explanation of the radar controls and MFD keys and their associated functions.
(1) ERP Radar Controls

The ERP faceplate contains several Weather Radar System controls. Control
functions are identical from one weather radar to another. When any of these controls
are activated the ERP sends the input to the FMS.
PUSH RDR ON – Located in the center of the RANGE knob, this switch is used to
activate the weather display on the MFD. When the MAP mode is displayed on the
MFD, pressing this switch will superimpose weather radar on the map display.
Pressing this switch a second time will remove the weather radar from the map
display. When this switch is pressed while the MFD is in HSI format, weather only
format will be displayed on the MFD.
RANGE – Turning this knob selects radar/map display range from 5 nm to 300 nm
and up to 600 nm in plan map. Range annunciation will be displayed on the MFD.
RDR – This key provides display of the Radar Functions page. (RADAR CNTRL) on
the onside FMS. Pressing this key a second time displays the second Radar Function
page. Radar functions are selected from these two pages.
PUSH ZERO – Located in the center of the TILT knob, this switch is pressed to set
the vertical tilt of the weather radar antenna to zero degrees.
TILT – Turning this knob selects the tilt angle of the weather radar antenna from -14
degrees to +14 degrees. Tilt annunciation is displayed on the ND/MFD.
(2) ERP/MFD Keys and Switches
HSI – This key provides display of a conventional compass rose on the MFD. A
traditional Horizontal Situation Indicator will be displayed. Radar targets will not
display in HSI format.
MAP – This key is used to display a present position map on the MFD.
TFC – This is only active if TCAS is installed. If so, it will display a traffic map on
the MFD.
NAV – This key is sued to display a navigation source menu (NAV SOURCE 1/1) on
the onside FMS from which navigation sensors may be selected for onside display on
the PFD/MFD.
BRG – This key is used to display a Bearing Pointers (BRG PTRS) menu. The menu
lists sensors that may be selected for driving bearing pointers on the PFD/MFD.
Page 22
34-60-22 1 May 2012
FAA Approval
1. General
Installation approval of the FMS is being accomplished under a variety of STCs and Forms
337. For a new installation to be eligible for installation approval, it will be necessary to
apply to the FAA for an STC, or to utilize an existing STC or Form 337.
NOTE: The TSO identifies the minimum performance standards, tests and other conditions
applicable for issuance of design and production approval of the article. The TSO
does not specifically identify acceptable conditions for installation of the article.
The TSO applicant is responsible for documenting all limitations and conditions
suitable for installation of the article. An applicant requesting approval for
installation of the article within a specific type or class of product is responsible for
determining environmental and functional compatibility.
NOTE: All first-time approvals using performance Vspeeds and engine thrust rating
computations for a specific aircraft model must be approved by TC or STC process.
A. Applicable TSOs
(1) TSO C115b (9/30/94): Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor
Inputs
(2) TSO C129a (2/20/96): Airborne Supplemental Navigation Equipment using the
Global Positioning System
(3) TSO C144 (3/12/98): Airborne Global Positioning System Antenna
B. Applicable Advisory Circulars and Other References
(1) AC 20-121A (8/24/88): Airworthiness Approval of Airborne Loran-C Systems for use
in the U.S. National Airspace System
(2) AC 20-129 (9/12/88): Airworthiness Approval of Vertical Navigation (V-Nav)
Systems for use in the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS) and Alaska
(3) AC 20-130A (6/14/95): Airworthiness Approval of Multi-Sensor Navigation Systems
for use in the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS) and Alaska
(4) AC 20-138 (5/25/94): Airworthiness Approval of Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation Equipment for use as a VFR and IFR Supplemental Navigation System
(5) AC 25-4 (2/18/66): Inertial Navigation System (INS)
(6) AC 25-15 (11/20/89): Approval of Flight Management Systems in Transport
Category Airplanes
(7) AC 90-94 (12/14/94): Guidelines for Using Global Positioning System Equipment
For IFR Enroute And Terminal Operations And For Non-precision Instrument
Approaches In The U.S. National Airspace System
(8) AC-90-97 (10/19/00): Use of Barometric Vertical Navigation (VNAV) for Instrument
Approach Operations Using Decision Altitude
Page 101
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(9) AC 91-49 (8/23/77): General Aviation Procedures for Flight in North Atlantic
Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace
(10) AC 120-33 6/24/77: Operational Approval of Airborne Long Range Navigation
Systems for Flight within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications Airspace
(11) LEAFLET NO 2 Rev 1 (14.05.97): JAA Guidance Material On Airworthiness
Approval And Operational Criteria For Use Of The Navigation Systems In European
Airspace Designated For Basic RNAV Operations (JAA Administrative & Guidance
Material Section 1/Part 3)
(12) LEAFLET NO. 3 Rev 1 (18.12.1997): JAA Guidance Material on Airworthiness
Approval and Operational Criteria for the Use of the Navstar Global Positioning
System (GPS)
C. Reference Documents
(1) RTCA Document No. DO-160C (December 1989): Environmental Conditions and
Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment
(2) RTCA Document No. DO-160D (29 July 1997): Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment
(3) RTCA Document No. DO-228 (20 Oct 1995): Minimum Operational Performance
Standards for Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Airborne Antenna
Equipment
(4) RTCA Document No. DO-187 (November 1984): Minimum Operational
Performance Standards for Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-Sensor
Inputs
(5) RTCA Document No. DO-178B (1 December 1992): Software considerations in
Airborne Systems and Equipment Certification
(6) RTCA Document No. DO-208 (July 1991): Minimum Operational Performance
Standards for Airborne Supplemental Navigation Equipment Using Global
Positioning System (GPS)
(7) ARINC Specification 419-3 (December 11, 1984): Digital Data System Compendium
(8) ARINC Specification 429-ALL: Mark 33 Digital Information Transfer System (DITS)
(9) ARINC Specification 561-11 (January 17, 1975): Air Transport Inertial Navigation
System (INS)
(10) ARINC Characteristic 571-2 (May 15, 1974): Inertial Sensor System (ISS)
(11) ARINC Specification 600-10 (March 1996): Air Transport Avionics Equipment
Interfaces
(12) ARINC Characteristic 704-6 (March 1993): Inertial Reference System
(13) ARINC Characteristic 706-4 (January 1988): Mark 5 Subsonic Air Data System
(14) FAA Notice 8110.60 Extension 11 (February 1997): GPS as a Primary Means of
Navigation for Oceanic/Remote Operations
Page 102
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(15) EUROCAE ED-58 (June 1988): Minimum Operational Performance Specification
for Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs
(16) EUROCAE ED-72A (April 1997): Minimum Operational Performance Specification
for Airborne GPS Receiving Equipment Used for Supplemental Means of Navigation
D. GPS TSO C129a Class A1, B1, and C1 Considerations
The GPS portion of the FMS is certified to TSO C129a Class A1, B1, and C1. The class
under which the installation may be approved, however, will be a function of several
considerations:
(1) Use of GPS during Approaches
The FMS supports GPS and GPS overlay approaches (NDB, VOR, VOR/DME and
RNAV). Specific requirements must be met in order to execute a GPS or GPS overlay
approach:
• The GPS sensor must conform to FAA Technical Standard Order (TSO) C129a
class A1, B1, or C1.
• The approach waypoint system coordinates must conform to World Geodetic
System-1984 (WGS-84) coordinate system.
• The published approach plate must have “GPS” in the title of the approach.
• The approach must be retrieved from the navigation database.
Under the above conditions, when a GPS, NDB, RNV, VOR/DME or VOR approach
is armed and activated then the GPS sensor will remain selected as a navigation
sensor and provide position input to the Kalman Filter best computed position. In the
case of RNV or VOR approaches, if the underlying approach navaid becomes invalid,
the approach guidance will continue to remain valid, assuming that the GPS accuracy,
flagging, and integrity monitoring criteria are satisfactory. If the published approach
plate does not have “GPS” in the title, it is the responsibility of the operator to
monitor the approach using the underlying navaid.
If the approach is a pilot-defined VOR / RNAV approach or is outside the USA and
Canada, then the GPS sensor will be deselected when the approach is armed or
activated, except for approaches that have been specifically coded as GPS overlay
approved.
(2) GPS Predictive RAIM
The GPS satellite geometry changes with aircraft position and time. Therefore, the
FMS with GPS also includes the capability of determining if a suitable number of
satellites, with acceptable geometry, will be available at the FAF and Missed
Approach Point at the estimated time of arrival. This prediction automatically occurs
when approach mode is armed. If RAIM will not be available at either of those times,
then the message NO RAIM @ FAF or NO RAIM @ MAP is displayed.
NOTE: Predictive RAIM feature will only work with GPS sensors certified to TSO
C129 or C129a Class A1/ B1/C1.
Page 103
34-60-22 1 May 2012
During enroute operations, it is also required to provide pilot requested predictions of
RAIM availability at the destination for a period of ETA ± 15-minutes in five-minute
increments. The RAIM At Destination feature is initiated from FPL MENU. RAIM
availability is displayed in terms of meeting ENR, TERM, or APPR criteria, i.e., 2.0
NM, 1.0 NM, and 0.3 NM respectively, at the destination airport at the estimated time
of arrival shown. If any RAIM availability is shown to be other than APPR for the ±
15-minute window, then the pilot should not plan to rely on GPS for position
determination during approach.
(3) GPS Integrity Annunciator
The FMS provides a logic signal to annunciate GPS INTEG whenever the integrity of
the GPS position cannot be assured to meet minimum requirements for the particular
phase of flight (enroute, terminal, or approach).
NOTE: Whenever the GPS INTEG annunciator comes on, the pilot should monitor
his GPS position by cross reference to other navigation sensors, if available.
GPS approaches should not be flown whenever the GPS INTEG annunciator
is on.
(4) GPS Operation in Remote/Oceanic Areas
The FMS can be approved for use as primary means of navigation in remote and
oceanic areas in accordance with FAA Notice 8110.60 without use of any other long-
range navigation sensors (IRS or Loran-C). In addition to the airborne hardware
requirements, an off-line Windows based PC program (available from Universal
Avionics Systems Corporation) must be used to perform a RAIM prediction analysis
to make sure that sufficient GPS coverage will exist for the proposed route of flight.
Operators must obtain a Letter of Authorization from FAA (or other certifying
agency) in order to conduct flights in remote/oceanic airspace. A data package is
available from Universal Avionics Systems Corporation (see Universal's Service
Letter No. 2738 for more information).
Page 104
34-60-22 1 May 2012
2. Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529, 25.1529,
27.1529 and 29.1529
Permission is hereby granted to use all or part of our statement for STC/337 certification
purposes.
Our statement in compliance with FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 follows:
Maintenance Requirements and Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness
SYSTEM: UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ Flight Management System
Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or Form 337 obligates the
aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operator’s Aircraft Maintenance Manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance
Program.
(1) Maintenance Manual information for the UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ (system description,
removal, installation, testing, etc.) is contained in Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation’s (UASC) Technical Manual 34-60-22. System operation is described
fully in the UASC Operator’s Manual Report No. 2423svXXX where XXX equals the
system software, such as SCN 800.
(2) Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers
contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC).
(3) Wiring diagram information contained in this data package should be placed into the
aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals.
(4) Scheduled Maintenance Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft maintenance program are as follows:
(a) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks: None Required.
(b) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/Checks to
Determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures: None Required.
NOTE: System performs full self-test at each power on and any failures are
annunciated to the pilot.
(c) Recommended Periodic Inspections: None Required.
(d) Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections: None Required.
3. Environmental Qualification Forms
The environmental categories under which the FMS is approved (Reference RTCA. DO-
160C and DO-160D) are listed on the accompanying Environmental Qualification Forms in
this section.
Page 105
34-60-22 1 May 2012
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE: UNS-1C+ Flight Management System
PART NO.: 10172-XX-XXX
TSO NUMBER: C115b & C129a, A1, B1, C1
DO178B: Level C
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATION AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION:
Contained in the appropriate Technical Manual
MANUFACTURER: Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 E. Universal Way
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160D
Conditions Category Description of Conducted Tests
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -55°/-15°C
and Operating Low Temperature D1 -55°/-20°C
Ground Survival and Short Time 4.5.2 A1 +85°/+70°C
High Operating Temperature D1 +85°/+70°C
Operating High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C
Inflight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000Ft/35,000 Ft
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 50,000 Ft
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 Ft
Temperature Variation 5.0 B ≥5°per minute
Humidity 6.0 A Standard humidity environment
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 B Fixed wing or helicopters - 20 g
Safety
Vibration 8.0 B, M, N Equipment Rack
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X Not Required
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 X Not Required
Sand and Dust 12.0 X Not Required
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X Not Required
Salt Spray 14.0 X Not Required
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike Conducted 17.0 A
Audio Freq. Cond. Susceptibility 18.0 Z
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Z
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R
Radio Frequency Emission 21.0 Z
Lightning-induced Transient 22.0 A3E3
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X Not Required
Icing 24.0 X Not Required
Page 106
34-60-22 1 May 2012
NOMENCLATURE: UNS-1E Flight Management System
PART NO.: 2017-XX-XXX
TSO NUMBER: C115b & C129a, A1, B1, C1
DO178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -55°/-15°C
and Operating Low Temperature D1 -55°/-20°C
Ground Survival and Short Time 4.5.2 A1 +85°/+70°C
High Operating Temperature D1 +85°/+70°C
Inflight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 Ft/35,000 Ft
Temperature Variation 5.0 B ≥5°per minute
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 B Fixed wing or helicopters - 20 g
Safety
Vibration 8.0 S, U Standard vibration for fixed wing, Robust
vibration for helicopter
Explosion Proofness 9.0 X Not Required
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike Conducted 17.0 A
Audio Freq. Cond. Susceptibility 18.0 Z
Radio Frequency Emission 21.0 M
Susceptibility
ESD 25.0 A
Page 107
34-60-22 1 May 2012
NOMENCLATURE: Configuration Module for UNS-1E & UNS-1C+
PART NO.: 10171
TSO NUMBER: C115b & C129a
DO178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 A2E1 -55°/-55°C
and Operating Low Temperature -55°/-20°C
Operating High Temperature 4.5.3 A2E1 +70°/+85°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 70,000 Ft
Temperature Variation 5.0 B
Humidity 6.0 A
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 Equipment tested per DO-160C, Para. 7
Safety
Operational Shock 7.2 6.0g
Crash Safety 7.3 15.0g
Vibration 8.0 B, M, N Equipment tested without shock mounts to
categories B, M and N and Saab test
profile specification 72EES0633
Explosion Proofness 9.0 E2 Intrinsically safe
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike 17.0 A
Audio Freq. Cond. Susceptibility - 18.0 Z
Power Input
Radio Frequency Emission of 21.0 Z
Energy
Susceptibility
Page 108
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Temporary Change No. 34.60.22-1

Manual Affected
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s FMS UNS-1E/1C+ FMS Technical Manual,
Report No. 34-60-22 dated 1 May 2012.
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the FAA Approval section adjacent Page 109.
Purpose
This Temporary Change updates all 4-Inch FPCDU Environmental Qualification Forms
(EQF) and adds an EQF for the 4-Inch FPCDU with Mod 14.
Instructions
Update EQFs on Pages 109 thru 111 with the following and add EQF with Part Number
1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (with Mod 14):
Page 1 of 6
34.60.22-1 19 February 2013
NOMENCLATURE: 4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit
PART NO.: 1117-XX
DO-178B: Level C
Contained in the appropriate Installation Manual
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -20°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating,
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Applicable
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 50,000 FT
Decompression 4.6.2 A1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1 -15,000 FT
Humidity 6.0 A 55°C, 95%, 48 HOURS
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 Equipment Tested per DO-160C, Para. 7
Safety
Operational Shocks 7.2 6.0 g
Crash Safety 7.3 15.0g, 12.0 g
Vibration 8.0 B, M & N
Explosion 9.0 X N/A, not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X N/A, no exposed to falling water in normal
operation
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X N/A, fluid containment no commonly encountered
Sand and dust 12.0 X N/A, not exposed to blowing sand and dust
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X N/A, not exposed to severe fungus contamination
Salt Spray 14.0 X N/A, not subjected to salt atmosphere
Power Input 16.0 Z
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z
Susceptibility
(radiated and conducted)
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 Z
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3E3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Susceptibility of AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X Equipment not externally mounted.
Icing 24.0 X Equipment not externally mounted.
Page 2 of 6
34.60.22-1 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -15°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating,
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 V 30 Minute Minimum
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 50,000 FT
Temperature Variation 5.0 B 5°C per minute
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SM & SB Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan (SB)
Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop (SM)
Explosion 9.0 X N/A, not spark producing and no hot surfaces
operation
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of one degree
Power Input 16.0 Z 28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Voltage Spike 17.0 A High degree of protection against voltage spikes
req’d
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z 28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility – Power Inputs
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Z Interference free operation is required
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R&V Ref. DO-160D
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 M Equipment not in direct view of receiver antenna.
Equipment located in cabin or cockpit
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X N/A, equipment not mounted externally
Icing 24.0 X N/A, equipment mounted in temperature controlled
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Page 3 of 6
34.60.22-1 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (without Mod 14)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival , -15°C ( A1), -20°C (D1) Operating
4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 ft (A1), 50,000 ft (D1)
Shock 7.0 B Equipment tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SB & SM Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan (SB)
Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop (SM)
Explosion 9.0 X Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
operation
required
28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3, J33
Ref. DO-160D
Susceptibility
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Page 4 of 6
34.60.22-1 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (with Mod 14)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Low Temperature Survival 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival , -15°C (A1), -20°C (D1) Operating
Low Temperature Short Term 4.5.1 A1D1
+85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
Operating
Low Temperature Operating 4.5.2 A1D1 -15°C (A1), 20 °C (D1)
High Temperature Survival 4.5.3 A1D1 +85°C
High Temperature Short Term 4.5.3 A1D1 +70°C
Operating
High Temperature Operating 4.5.4 A1D1 +55°C
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 ft (A1), 50,000 ft (D1)
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 SB Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan
SM Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop
U Helicopters with unknown rotor related
frequencies
Explosion 9.0 X Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
operation
required
28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment
Page 5 of 6
34.60.22-1 19 February 2013
Conditions DO-160E Category

Description of Conducted Tests
Section
Susceptibility
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X N/A
Page 6 of 6
34.60.22-1 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-XX
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
High Temperature 4.5.2 and A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival (+70°C Short
4.5.3 Term)
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Applicable
7.0 Equipment Tested per DO-160C, Para. 7
Shock 7.2 6.0 g
7.3 15.0g, 12.0 g
Vibration 8.0 B, M & N
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 X
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X
Sand and dust 12.0 X
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 Z
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3E3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Susceptibility of
AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X
Icing 24.0 X
Page 109
34-60-22 1 May 2012
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -15°C Operating, -55°C Survival
4.5.3 Term)
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 V
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SM & SB
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R&V
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 M
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 110
34-60-22 1 May 2012
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 D1 -20°C Operating, -55°C Survival
4.5.3 Term)
Operational Shock 7.2 B 6g Peak
Crash Safety 7.3 B 20g Peak, 20g Sustained
Vibration 8.0 S
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R, RR
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 111
34-60-22 1 May 2012
PART NO.: 1018-X-XXX (Without Mod 9 or Mod 11)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
Low Operating Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X N/A
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 S
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R, R
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 112
34-60-22 1 May 2012
PART NO.: 1018-XX-XX3 (with Mod 9)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160D
Conditions Section Category Description of Conducted Tests
Ground Survival and Operating 4.5.1 D1 -20°C
Low Temperature
Ground Survival and Short-time 4.5.2 D1 +85°C /+70°C
High Operating Temperature
Operating High Temperature 4.5.3 D1 +55°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X No external cooling required
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 +50,000 FT
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 +50,000 FT
Temperature Variation 5.0 B >5°C per minute
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 S Standard Vibration for fixed wing, profiles B and M
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R, RR
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 113
34-60-22 1 May 2012
PART NO.: 1018-X-XX3 (with Mod 11)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Conditions Section Category Description of Conducted Tests
Ground Survival Low 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival, -40°C Short Time
Temperature/Short-Time
Operating Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature 4.5.2 D1 -20°C
Ground Survival High 4.5.3 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Time
Temperature/Short-Time
Operating High Temperature
Humidity 6.0 A Standard Humidity
Shock 7.0 B Equipment in Fixed Wing and Helicopters tested
for operational Shock
Vibration 8.0 S (M) Standard vibration category S with profile M for
fixed wing aircraft.
U2 Robust vibration for helicopters per DO-160F
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Magnetic Effect 15.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike 17.0 X
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 X
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 X
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 X
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 X
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X
Page 114
34-60-22 1 May 2012
NOMENCLATURE: Solid State Data Transfer Unit
PART NO.: 1408-( )
TSO NUMBER: C109
DO178B: Level D
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 C4 -55° C Survival Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature -20° C Operating Low Temperature
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 C4 +85° C Survival High Temperature
Short Term High Operating Temperature +70° C Operating High Temperature
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 - -15,000 feet
Operational Shocks and Crash Safety 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 SM, SB Standard vibration test
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H Hot spot non-spark producing surfaces
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X Not Required
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Deflection distance is less than 0.3 m
Power Input 16.0 Z DO-160E allows Z in place of B
Voltage Spike 17.0 A High degree of protection required.
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z DO-160E allows Z in place of B
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZC Interference-free operation is required
primary power is a constant freq. or DC
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R Installed in normal HIRF environment
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 E3
Susceptibility
Electric Discharge 25.0 A Air discharge applied to normally
accessible surfaces
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X Not required
Page 115
34-60-22 1 May 2012
NOMENCLATURE: Data Transfer Unit DTU-100
PART NO.: 1406-( )
TSO NUMBER: C109
DO-178B: Level D
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 C4 0°C
High Temperature 4.5.3 C4 +70°C
Altitude 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 ft.
Decompression 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 ft.
Overpressure 4.6.3
Humidity 6.0 A
Shock 7.0 E
Vibration 8.0 SM
SB
Explosion 9.0 E2
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 V
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 116
34-60-22 1 May 2012
NOMENCLATURE: GPS/GNSS Antenna
PART NO.: 10705
TSO NUMBER: C144
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 F2
Low Temperature 4.5.1 F2 -55°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.3 F2 +70°C Operating, +85°C Survival
Altitude 4.6.1 F2 +55,000 ft.
Temperature Variation 5.0 A
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 C, L, M &
Y
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 S
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 F
Sand and dust 12.0 D
Fungus Resistance 13.0 F
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 P
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 X
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXA3
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 2A
Icing 24.0 C
ESD 25.0 X
Page 117
34-60-22 1 May 2012
NOMENCLATURE: GPS Antenna
PART NO.: 10706
TSO NUMBER: C129
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 F2
Low Temperature 4.5.1 F2 -55°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.3 F2 +70°C Operating, +85°C Survival
Altitude 4.6.1 F2 +55,000 ft.
Temperature Variation 5.0 A
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 Equipment tested per DO-160C, Para 7
Crash Safety 7.3 15g
Vibration 8.0 C, L & Y
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 S
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 F
Sand and dust 12.0 D
Fungus Resistance 13.0 F
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Magnetic Effect 15.0 X
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 X
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 A
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 M
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 2A
Icing 24.0 C
Page 118
34-60-22 1 May 2012
4. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement [80X.X]
Prepare an Airplane Flight Manual Supplement using the following sample as a guide.
NOTE: Comments in angle brackets, < >, and italics are explanatory only and should not
appear in the final supplement.
<Name of Applicant> AFM Supplement for <Aircraft Model>
<Address>
Supplement No.
{SAMPLE}
FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
FOR
AIRCRAFT MAKE: ___________________________________________

AIRCRAFT MODEL: __________________________________________
AIRCRAFT REG: _____________________________________________
AIRCRAFT S/N: ______________________________________________
This supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the
airplane is modified by the installation of a Universal Avionics Systems Corporation (UASC)
UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ Flight Management System (FMS), in accordance with STC
____________________________, (or Form 337).
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic manual only in those
areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in
this supplement, consult the appropriate basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA Approved:
<Name>
<Title>
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>
<Address>
FAA Approved Date:
Page 1 of Y
Page 119
34-60-22 1 May 2012
REVISION HISTORY
SHEET REV DESCRIPTION APPROVED
1-….. N/C Original Document Date:_______________
{Name}
{Title}
FEDERAL AVIATION
ADMINISTRATION
{Name of Aircraft Certification Office}
{Address}
Page X of Y
Page 120
34-60-22 1 May 2012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1 General 4
2 Limitations 5
3 Emergency and Abnormal Procedures 8
4 Normal Procedures 9
5 Performance Data 12
Page X of Y
Page 121
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Section I
A. Installation Description
<The following is a sample of how the introduction could read. Fully describe all interfaces
with the UNS-1E or UNS-1C+.>
The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UNS-1E/C+ installation is interfaced with a
DME sensor and a VOR sensor for short range navigation data. An internal GPS provides
long-range position data, which is integrated with the VOR/DME position data. The internal
GPS incorporates Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM).
The UNS-1E/C+ receives air data from an approved Air Data Computer. The system
provides navigation and steering data to the pilot’s Collins EHSI-74 Flight Instruments and
the Collins APS-65 Flight Control System.
The UNS-1E/C+ contains software 80X.X, which provides capability for point-to-point
navigation, and approaches. Lateral steering is provided for enroute, terminal area, and
approach operation.
B. Lateral Navigation Approvals
Provided the UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ multi-sensor navigation system is receiving usable
signals, it has been demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet the accuracy
specifications of:
(1) <The following is applicable to all installations>
VFR/IFR enroute, terminal and instrument approach (GPS stand-alone and GPS
overlay VOR VOR- DME, NDB, and RNAV) operation within the U. S. National
Airspace System using the WGS-84 coordinate reference datum in accordance with
the criteria of AC 20-130A. Satellite navigation is based upon use of only the Global
Positioning System (GPS) operated by the United States.
(2) <The following is applicable to Remote / Oceanic approval per Notice 8110.60 >
The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ installation with internal GPS sensors as installed has been
found to comply with the requirements for GPS primary means of navigation in
oceanic and remote airspace, when used in conjunction with the Universal Off Line
RAIM prediction program. This does not constitute an operational approval.
(3) <The following is applicable to dual systems with two long-range sensors in
accordance with the NAT MNPS Advisory Circulars. Note that the GPS in the UNS-
1E/D+ can be used as one of the two required long-range sensors, since it does
incorporate RAIM.>
Flight in the North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications
(MNPS) airspace in accordance with AC 91-49 and AC 120-33.
(4) <The following is applicable to installations with approved INS/IRS sensor(s).>
FAR Part 121, Appendix G, Section 6 and Advisory Circular AC 25-4.
Page X of Y
Page 122
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) <The following is applicable when interfaced with an approved Loran-C sensor.>
VFR/IFR RNAV operation within the conterminous United States and Alaska in
accordance with the enroute criteria of AC 20-121A.
(6) <The following is applicable when no other external sensors are interfaced.>
The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+, when operating with RAIM GPS as the only navigation
sensor, is approved for IFR enroute, terminal, and approach operations in accordance
with AC 20-138.
C. Vertical Navigation Approval
The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ Flight Management Systems, as installed, meet the requirements
for VFR / IFR enroute, terminal area and approach VNAV operation within the conterminous
United States and Alaska in accordance with the criteria of AC 20-129.
Page X of Y
Page 123
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Section 2
<The following limitations are representative. Refer to additional FAA guidance in Advisory
Circulars 20-130, 20-121A and 20-130A or 20-138 as applicable to your installation.>
A. Operator’s Manual
The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ Operator’s Manual, Report 2423SV80X/90X, dated XXXX (or
later revision) must be available to the flight crew whenever navigation is predicated on the
use of the UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ Flight Management System. This AFM supplement is
intended for use with software version SCN 800.X.
B. System Position
The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ system position must be checked for accuracy prior to use as a
means of navigation and under the following conditions:
Following a period of POSITION UNCERTAIN, dead reckoning, the aircraft position should
be verified by visually sighting ground reference points and/or by using other navigation
equipment such as VOR, DME, TACAN, INS, NDB, and/or radar fix.
C. Database / Waypoint Verification
IFR enroute and terminal navigation are prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency of
the database or verifies each selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to current approved
data. FMS instrument approaches must be programmed with data from current published
instrument approach procedures.
D. Long Range Sensors
Navigation cannot be predicated on the use of non-GPS long range sensors alone while in
terminal areas or during departures from or approaches to airports or into valleys; e.g.,
between peaks in mountainous terrain or below Minimum Enroute Altitude (MEA).
E. Latitude Limits
Displayed UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ navigation parameters are referenced to Magnetic North.
Operation of the aircraft is limited to latitudes between 73° North and 60° South, unless
magnetic variation is manually entered by the pilot.
<Add appropriate comments about Mag/True switch if installed with IRS as heading
source.>
F. Approach Mode
The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ is approved for lateral Flight Director and autopilot coupled GPS,
NDB, RNAV, VOR-DME, and VOR approaches only when the UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ is in
FMS Approach Mode (which provides expanded HSI deviations).
Page X of Y
Page 124
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. Instrument Approaches
Instrument approaches must be accomplished in accordance with approved instrument
approach procedures that are retrieved from the FMS navigation database. The navigation
database must incorporate the current update cycle.
(1) Instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach mode, and GPS integrity
monitoring (when using GPS for approach guidance) must be available at the Final
Approach Fix, as indicated to the pilot by the “GPS INTEG” amber annunciator being
off.
(2) When an alternate airport is required by the applicable operating rules, it must be
served by an approach based on other then GPS navigation, the aircraft must have
operational equipment capable of using that navigation aid, and the required
navigation aid must be operational.
(3) GPS may only be used for approach guidance if the reference coordinate datum
system for the approach is WGS-84.
NOTE: GPS will be deselected at approach activation for any non-GPS approved
approach or for any pilot-defined VOR or RNAV approach.
(4) The UNS-1E or UNS-1C+ is approved for FMS “VFR” approaches as a pilot aid
only.
H. Navigation Equipment
The aircraft must have other approved navigation equipment installed and operating
appropriate for the route of flight.
I. VNAV Altitude Reference
When using VNAV, the altimeter on each pilot’s panel must be used as the altitude reference
for all operations.
J. Fuel Display
Fuel display parameters are advisory only and do not replace primary fuel quantity or fuel
flow gages for fuel load and range planning.
K. DME-Arc Display
The EFIS MAP display must not be used for pictorial situational awareness when a DME-arc
procedure is the active TO leg. The MAP display cannot depict a DME arc.
Page X of Y
Page 125
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Section 3
A. Emergency Procedures
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
B. Abnormal Procedures
(1) If GPS RAIM becomes unavailable (indicated by a message and GPS INTEG amber
annunciator), the pilot should monitor position by cross reference to other navigation
sources as necessary.
(2) Should an FMS system component fail, in most cases the display will go blank or the
remote MSG light will flash. Pushing the MSG key will display the Message Page,
which will indicate the component that has failed.
(3) The FMS and associated components are protected by the following circuit breakers:
COMPONENT NAME BUS LOCATION
FMS DC
FMS AC
FMS ADC
TAT Probe HTR
FMS SIU
(4) In the event that a circuit breaker should “open”, the corresponding unit will be
switched off internally.
(5) If sensor information is intermittent or lost, use the remaining operational navigation
equipment as required.
(6) If VNAV information is intermittent or lost, disengage VNAV and use the altimeter
for vertical reference.
Page X of Y
Page 126
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Section 4
A. Operation
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the FMS Operator’s Manual, Report No.
2423sv80X/90X.
B. Navigation Database Verification
After power-on self-tests have been completed, the INITIALIZATION page will appear. The
expiration date of the database will appear at the bottom of the display. If the actual date is
later than the expiration date, the FMS will notify the pilot with a “DATABASE EXPIRED”
message. Refer to the operator’s manual for navigation database update instructions.
C. System Annunciators
<Describe all external annunciators installed as part of the FMS>
The FMS generates outputs for the following annunciators on the pilot and copilot’s
instrument panels located in or adjacent to the HSI and ADI
ANNUNCIATOR MEANING
MSG (amber) Indicates a message is to be acknowledged on the MSG
page.
WPT (Amber) Indicates waypoint alert two minutes prior to waypoint in
enroute mode, and 15 seconds prior in approach mode.
When this annunciator flashes, it indicates that an
upcoming vertical Flight Path Angle (FPA) change is within
two minutes.
SXT (Amber) Selected crosstrack is active.
HDG (Blue) The FMS is in heading sub.
APP (White) An approach has been activated.
GPS INTEG (Amber) GPS Integrity is outside of the allowable limit for phase of
flight (2.0 NM enroute, 1.0 NM terminal and approach
transition, and 0.3 NM for final approach segment).
See also Section 3B, ABNORMAL PROCEDURES.
Page X of Y
Page 127
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. Aircraft Integration
<The following is a sample of what the integration discussion could represent. Fully and
accurately describe all switching procedures and display options where applicable.>
(1) Collins EHSI-74 EHSI display of FMS Nav Information
NOTE: FMS can only be selected for use when a VOR frequency is tuned on the #1
Navigation receiver. Selection of an ILS frequency will cause the display to
revert to VHF Navigation.
When a valid navigation leg is selected on the FMS, guidance information can be
selected for display on the pilot's or copilot’s EHSI and ADI by selecting [FMS] on
the [FMS/NAV] switch on the Instrument Panel, adjacent to the ADI. Left-right,
TO/FR, Nav valid, Desired Track, Bearing to Waypoint, and Distance to Waypoint
will be depicted on the EHSI. With a valid VNAV leg defined on the FMS, vertical
deviation will be displayed
HSI DEVIATION SCALE FACTORS FOR 2 DOTS
MODE LATERAL VERTICAL
Enroute 5.0 nm 1500 ft.
Terminal 1.0 nm 500 ft.
Approach 2 degrees to 0.3 nm, then linear 200 ft.
(2) Enroute Flight Director and Autopilot Operation

When a valid navigation leg is selected on the FMS, flight director lateral V-Bar
steering can be selected on the pilot’s ADI by selecting [NAV] mode on the APS-65
Flight Guidance Panel. Pushing [ENG] will couple the FMS steering to the autopilot.
NOTE: Only lateral steering is provided from the FMS. Select an appropriate
vertical mode on the APS-65.
(3) Approach Operation
GPS, NDB, RNAV, VOR, VOR/DME, and VFR approaches may be linked into the
flight plan and laterally coupled to the autopilot by selecting heading mode [HDG]
then approach mode [APPR] on the autopilot mode selector. A remote panel mounted
APRCH annunciator illuminates whenever FMS Approach Mode is active. Refer to
Approach Procedures in the Operator's Manual.
(4) Vertical Navigation
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) mode is available for descent only. Pitch steering
commands for ENROUTE VNAV descent are not provided.
Page X of Y
Page 128
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Section 5
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Page Y of Y
Page 129
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Equipment Specifications
1. Equipment Identification
A. UNS–1E & UNS-1C+ FMS Equipment
Component Name Part Number
FMS UNS-1E 2017–XX–XXX or
UNC-1C+ 10172-XX-XXX
Configuration Module 10171
5-Inch Flat Panel CDU (optional) 1018-X-XXX
4-Inch Flat Panel CDU (optional) 1117-XX, 1117-X-XXX
DTU-100 – Data Transfer Unit 1406–01–X
1407–01–1 (Portable unit)
SSDTU – Solid State Data Transfer Unit 1408-00-X
1409-00-2 (Portable Unit)
GPS/GNSS Antenna 10705
GPS Antenna 10706
B. Compatible Peripheral Equipment

Component Name Part Number
Application Server Unit (ASU) 3040-06-0X
LCS – Loran–C Sensor 1040
LCS–850–Loran–C Sensor 1045–01
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit
Collins CSDB 1055
ARINC RTU 1056–01–XX
RRS – Radio Reference Sensor 1058–01–1X
LCS – Loran–C Antenna 10401
10402 (LCS–850)
GPS–1000 GPS Sensor 1075–01
GPS-1000A GPS Sensor 1078-01
GPS–1200 GPS Sensor 1080–01
GNSS-2400 GPS/GNSS Sensor 1078-02
ADS–550 Air Data Sensor 1550–0X–XX
UL-600 UniLink 1065-XX-XXX
UL-800 UniLink 10800-00
UL-801 UniLink 10801-00
Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) 3010-0X-0X
Universal Cockpit Display (UCD) 3050-00-XX
UniVision 3070-0X-00
Vision-1 3015-00-00
Page 201
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Technical Manuals
Refer to the following manuals for further information about compatible peripheral
equipment. These manuals are available from Universal Avionics Systems Corporation.
Equipment Manual
ADS–550 Air Data Sensor Report No. 34-10-02
Application Server Unit (ASU) Report No. 46-20-03
FMS Configuration Manual Report No. 34-60-26
FMS Interface Manual Report No. 34-60-27
LCS – Loran–C Antenna Report No. 34-50-13
LCS – Loran–C Sensor Report No. 34-50-13
GPS–1000 GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-03
GPS-1000A GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-08
GPS–1200 GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-04
GNSS-2400 GPS/GNSS Sensor Report No. 34-50-08
RRS – Radio Reference Sensor Report No. 34-50-10
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit Report No. 23-80-05
Collins CSDB
ARINC RTU
Terrain Awareness and Warning System Report No. 34-40-01
UL-600 UniLink Report No. 23-20-01
UniVision Report No. 23-30-03
Universal Cockpit Display (UCD) Report No.46-20-01
Vision-1 Report No. 34-40-03
NOTE: Refer to these manuals for more information about compatible peripheral equipment. These
manuals are available from Universal Avionics Systems Corporation.
Page 202
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. UNS-1E Flight Management System
2017 - X X - 2 X 1
Basic UNS-1E P/N
FMS without GPS = 0

MMMS with GPS/GNSS = 1
FMS with GPS/GNSS = 2
MMMS without GPS = 5
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
Video & Graphics = 2
All Digital = 0
Analog Outputs = 1
Dual ARINC Board = 2
ASCB Version A = 3
Analog w/Hi-Level Dev Out = 5
Unused Variable = 1
Page 203
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. UNS-1C+ Flight Management System
1017 2 - X X - 2 X 1
Basic UNS-1C+ P/N
FMS without GPS = 0

MMMS with GPS = 3
FMS with GPS = 4
MMMS without GPS = 5
MMMS with GPS/GNSS = 6
FMS with GPS/GNSS = 7
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Video/No Graphics = 0
Video = 1
Video & Graphics = 2
All Digital = 0
Analog Outputs = 1
Dual ARINC Board = 2
ASCB Version A = 3
Analog w/Hi-Level Dev Out = 5
Standard Glass = 1
F. Configuration Module
The part number of the Configuration Module is 10171.
Page 204
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. 5-Inch FPCDU
1018 - X - X X X
Basic Part Number
No Video = 1
Video = 2
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Graphics = 0
UniLink Graphics Capable = 1
Standard Glass = 0
Hi-Resolution Glass = 3
H. 4-Inch FPCDU (1117-XX)
1117 - X X
Basic P/N
Aft Position = 5
Forward Position = 6
Gray = 1
Black = 2
I. 4-Inch FPCDU (1117-X-XXX)
1117 - X - X X X
Basic P/N
No Video = 1
Video = 2
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Graphics = 0
UniLink Graphics Capable = 1
Aft Mount* = 3
Forward Mount* = 4
Aft Position* = 5
Forward Position* = 6
NOTE: A new faceplate/glass assembly is designated by -XX5 and -XX6 which

replaces -XX3 and -XX4 respectively.
Page 205
34-60-22 1 May 2012
J. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100)
1406 - 01 - X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU-100
Future Use
Gray Faceplate = 1
Black Faceplate = 2
K. Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100)

1407 - 01 - 1
Basic Part Number for Portable DTU-100
Future Use
L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit

1408 - 00 - X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit SSDTU
Future Use
Gray Faceplate = 1
Black Faceplate = 2
M. Portable Solid State Data Transfer Unit

1409 - 00 - 2
Basic Part Number for Portable SSDTU
Future Use
Black Faceplate = 2
Page 206
34-60-22 1 May 2012
N. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ FMS Part Number Descriptions
(1) All Digital Configuration (P/N 2017–XX–X01 or 10172-XX-X0X)
This configuration has a CPU board, Auxiliary board, and an ARINC board. This
option supports aircraft with no need for analog interfaces other than annunciators
and fuel flow inputs.
(2) Digital and Analog Configurations (P/N 2017–XX–X11 or 10172-XX-X1X)
These configurations each have a CPU board, Auxiliary board, ARINC board, and an
Analog board. The Analog board supplies AC pitch steering outputs. These options
are wired for analog navigational signals. Depending on which Analog board is
installed, the NCU outputs Hi Level Deviation or accepts 565 Air Data or both.
(3) Dual ARINC Configuration (P/N 2017–XX–X21 or 10172-XX-X2X)
This configuration has a CPU board, Auxiliary board, and two ARINC board. This
option provides an additional 8 ARINC 429 Input ports and 6 ARINC 429 Output
ports and supports aircraft with no need for analog interfaces other than annunciators
and fuel flow inputs.
(4) ASCB Version A Configuration (P/N 2017–XX–X31 or 10172-XX-X3X)
This configuration has a CPU board, WAAS/ARINC board, WAAS/Analog board,
ASCB board and Auxiliary board. The ASCB board provides the FMS with an
interface to the ASCB Version A data bus that was developed by Honeywell and
supplements ARINC, CSDB and analog interfaces of the FMS. The ASCB board
hardware supports data bus Version A only.
(5) Standard Digital Interface Capabilities with Double Density ARINC (DDA) Board:
• Air Data Computer Input – ARINC 429 or 575
• Long Range Nav Sensors (ARINC) IRS, IRGPS, LCS & GPS
• Radar Joystick Interfaces – ARINC 429, 571 or CSDB
• Sensor Inputs in Various Combinations of:
– Up to 3 – IRS or IRGPS
– 1 – LCS
– 1 – DME
– Up to 3 – GPS (two external and one internal)
• Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS)
• FMS Crossfill (push or pull)
• ARINC Digital Data Output Buses
– 429 High–Speed
– 561 (6 wire)
– 429 Low–Speed
– 571
Page 207
34-60-22 1 May 2012
• UniLink (Text Only)
• TAWS MFD
• Analog Interface Capabilities
– Synchro Heading Input
– Roll Command Steering Output
– Standard Analog Outputs Including:
Desired Track – Synchro
Bearing To Waypoint – Synchro
Lateral and Vertical Deviation
Flags and Valids
TO/FROM
• Fuel Flow Interface Capabilities – Fuel Flow Processing Available.
– Interfaces with fuel flow systems outputting:
DC Analog
G.E. AC pickoff
Pulse Width and Frequency
Intertechnique Pulse
ARINC Digital
– Interfaces include some models of the following manufacturers: Ametek,
Canadian Marconi (CMA), Eldec, X & O Engineering, General Electric
(G.E.), Gull, Howell, Intertechnique, J.E.T., Ragen, and Simmons fuel
flow systems.
Page 208
34-60-22 1 May 2012
2. Power Specifications
Power specifications for the components of the FMS and compatible peripherals are as
follows:
NOTE: FMS power specifications are based on the particular configuration that will
consume the most power. All other configurations use less.
Component Current (A @ V) Power (W @ V)
Type Part Number 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V
Min Nominal Max Min Nominal Max
UNS-1E 2017-XX-2X1 1.73 1.52 1.51 32.87 41.8 48.32
UNS-1C+ 10172-XX-XXX 1.73 1.52 1.51 32.87 41.8 48.32
5-Inch FPCDU 1018-X-XXX 0.9 0.6 0.6 17.1 16.5 19.2
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-XX 0.9 0.6 0.6 17.1 16.5 19.2
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX3 0.9 0.87 0.75 17.1 23.93 24.0
1117-X-XX4
w/o Mod 9
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX3 1.15 1.50 1.55 21.85 41.25 49.60
1117-X-XX4
with Mod 9
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX5 0.74 0.51 0.44 14.06 14.03 14.08
1117-X-XX6
RTU 1055 0.5 0.3 0.3 9.5 8.3 9.6
RTU (ARINC) 1056-01-XX 0.7 0.5 0.4 13.8 13.2 12.8
DTU-100 1406-01-X 0.3 0.3 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
Portable 1407-01-1 0.3 0.4 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
DTU-100
SSDTU 1408-00-X 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
Portable 1409-00-2 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
SSDTU
RRS 1058 1.1 0.8 0.7 20.9 22.0 19.2
LCS 1040 1.1 0.7 0.6 20.9 19.3 19.2
GPS-1000 1075-01 0.33 0.23 0.20 6.27 6.33 6.40
GPS-1200 1080-01 0.4 0.3 0.3 7.6 8.3 9.6
Page 209
34-60-22 1 May 2012
3. Equipment Specification Tables
The following tables list the physical, environmental and electrical parameters of the Flight
Management System.
A. UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ FMS
Characteristics Specifications
Size 5.75” W x 6.38” H x 8.98" D
Weight: XXXXX-XX-XXX w/o Mod 3 8.1 lbs.
2017-4X-221 & -211 w Mod 3 7.6 lbs.
2017-4X-201 7.4 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 turn Dzus Fasteners
Power Requirements (nominal) 27.5 VDC, 1.5 A, 41.25 W
Keypad Lighting 2.77 A @ 28 VDC
1.18 A @ 5 VDC
B. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)

Size 5.75" W x 6.37" H x 4.177" D
Component Weight 1018-X-XX0 3.8 lbs.
1018-X-XX3 (w/o Mod 9) 4.1 lbs.
1018-X-XX3 (with Mod 9) 3.3 lbs.
Power Requirements Power input from NCU 19.2 W maximum
(Startup may be higher)
Panel Lighting 0.46 A @ 28 V maximum or
1.54 A @ 5 V maximum
Page 210
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. 4-Inch FPCDU
Size 5.75" W x 4.50" H x 3.25" D
Component Weight 1117-XX 2.6 lbs.1117-X-XX3 2.9 lbs.
1117-X-XX4 2.9 lbs.
1117-X-X05 2.41 lbs.
1117-X-X06 2.41 lbs.
1117-X-X15 2.50 lbs.
1117-X-X16 2.50 lbs.
Power Requirements Power input from NCU 19.2 W maximum
(Startup may be higher)
Panel Lighting 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3, 1117-X-XX4 - 0.5 A @
28 V maximum 1.6 A @ 5 V maximum
1117-X-XX5, 1117-X-XX6 - 0.4 A @ 28 V
maximum 2.07 A @ 5 V maximum, also an
internal heater for brightness stabilization draws
approximately 1.0 amp
D. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) (P/N 1406-01-X)

Size 5.750" W x 2.124" H x 8.14" D
Component Weight 3.25 lbs. (P/N 1406–01–X)
5.8 lbs. (P/N 1407–01–1) (Portable)
Power Requirements 18 VDC @ 0.22 A
27.5 VDC @ 0.350 A Nominal
Mounting 1/4 Turn DZUS Fasteners
(1406–01–X only)
E. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)

Size 5.750” W x 2.250” H x 7.764" D
Weight 2.4 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 Turn Dzus Fastener
Power Requirements (nominal) 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W
Page 211
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. Portable SSDTU (P/N 1409-00-2)

Unit Size 6” W x 12.5” H x 5.5" D
Weight N/A
Power Requirements 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W
Cooling N/A
Mounting SSDTU mounted in portable carrying case
Interconnect Wiring Harness P/N 81304072 – PSSDTU J1 to aircraft bulkhead J1
Part Numbers (see NOTE) (New installation and previous Portable DTU-100
Contact Universal Avionics for connection)
more information. P/N 81140811 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft bulkhead J2
(Previous Portable DTU-100 connection)
P/N 81140821 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft bulkhead J2
(New installation)
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU in new installations or upgrading the Portable
DTU-100 bulkhead connectors to the Portable SSDTU bulkhead connectors, up
to 8 Ethernet ports may be wired and configured.
When bulkhead connectors from a prior Portable DTU-100 installation are used
for the Portable SSDTU, up to 4 Ethernet ports may be available for use and
configuration. Consult aircraft wiring diagrams to verify the number of Ethernet
ports that are wired.
Page 212
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. GPS/GNSS Antenna (P/N 10705)
Characteristic Specification
AeroAntenna P/N AT1675-4UAW-TNCF-000-RG-30-NM
Weight 0.42 lb.
Frequency 1565-1585 & 1597-1608 MHz
VSWR ≤ 2.0:1
Polarization Type Right-Hand Circular
Axial Ratio < 3 dB at bore sight
Radiation Coverage Elevation Angle Minimum Gain
>15° –2.0 dBic
10° –3.0 dBic
5° –4.5 dBic
0° –7.5 dBic
Impedance 50 Ω
Gain 30 ± 3 dB (NOTE)
Voltage Range 4.5 - 18 VDC
Current Draw 75 mA nominal
Noise Figure 3.0 dB max
Antenna Bonding < 10 mΩ to mounted aircraft skin
Rejection @ Satcom 100 dB
Frequency of 1625 MHz
Icing With 0.050 inch thick hard ice on radome, a gain decrease of no
greater than 2 dB from no-ice condition when signal is viewed at
30° or greater elevation with respect to horizon.
TSO C144
NOTE: Some earlier 10705 Antennas had gains higher than 30 dB:
AeroAntenna P/N: AT575-126UAW-TNCF-000-RG-36-NM, 36 ± 3 db.
This alternate version is no longer available.
Page 213
34-60-22 1 May 2012
H. GPS Antenna (P/N 10706)
Characteristic Specification
AeroAntenna P/N AT575-126UAW-TNCF-000-RG-30-NM
Weight 0.44 lb.
Frequency 1575 ± 10 MHz
VSWR ≤ 2.0:1
Polarization Type Right-Hand Circular
Axial Ratio < 3 dB at bore sight
Radiation Coverage Elevation Angle Minimum Gain
> 15° –2.0 dBic
10° –3.0 dBic
5° –4.5 dBic
0° –7.5 dBic
Impedance 50 Ω
Gain 30 ± 3 dB (NOTE)
Voltage Range 5 - 18 VDC
Current Draw 35 mA nominal
Noise Figure 3.0 dB max
Antenna Bonding < 10 mΩ to mounted aircraft skin
Rejection @ Satcom 35 dB
Frequency of 1625 MHz
Icing With 0.050 inch thick hard ice on radome, a gain decrease of no
greater than 2 dB from no-ice condition when signal is viewed at
30° or greater elevation with respect to horizon.
TSO C144
NOTE: Some earlier 10706 Antennas had gains higher than 30 dB:
a. AeroAntenna P/N: AT575-126UAW-TNCF-000-RG-36-NM, 36 ± 3 dB
b. AeroAntenna P/N: AT575-126UAW-TNCF-000-RG-38-NM, 38 ± 3 dB
These alternate versions are no longer available.
Page 214
34-60-22 1 May 2012
4. Installation Kits
A. Flight Management System Installation Kit P/N K12024
NOTE: Configuration Module, P/N 10171, is not part of the installation kit.
Quantity Part Number Description
1 83002611 J1 Connector, Plug, Circular,
or 61POS (A CLKD)
MS27473T24F61SA
or 61POS (STD CLK)
MS27473T24F61S
or 61POS (D CLKD)
MS27473T24F61SD
3 83001992 Backshell/Strain Relief
or
M85049/49-2S24N
B. 4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit P/N K12026-4

Quantity Part Number or Equivalent Description
1 83001150 FPCDU connector
or
91-577049-15S (Amphenol) Amphenol
1 83002086 Video connector
or
MS27473T12F8S or Amphenol/Bendix,
MS27473T12A8S or Burndy/Souriau, ITT Cannon, or
MS27473T12B8S Matrix Science
1 83002087 Video connector backshell
or
M85049/49-2-12W or
M85049/49-2-12A or
M85049/49-2-12N
1 83001087-02 UniLink connector
or
MS27473T12F8SC
Page 215
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050
1 83001150 Connector J1
or
91-577049-15S Amphenol
JT06RE-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
JT06RT-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
MS27473E14F15S(SR)
1 83002152 Connector, J2, Plug 15P Circular
or Size 14 (C CLKD)
MS27473T14F15SC
1 83001157-02 Strain Relief, Crimp Circular,
or Plug, Size 14, Olive Drab
M85049/49-2-14W
D. Portable Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050-1

1 83000131 DTU Connector, J1, Receptacle,
or Size 10, 13-SKT, Crimp, Wall
Mount, (STD CLK)
MS27472E10A35S
MS27472E10B35S
MS27472E10F35S
1 83002154 DTU Connector, J2, Receptacle,
or Circular, Size 14, 15P Male Crimp
Type, Panel Mount W/ Flange
MS27472E14B15PC
Page 216
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-1
1 83000255 Connector J2, Plug,16 Shell
or Circular 55P Crimp (STD CLK)
MS27473T16A35S
MS27473T16B35S
1 83000257 Backshell J2, 16 Straight, Circular
or Connector (Electroless Nickel)
M85049/49-2S16N
1 83001150 Connector J1, Plug,14 Shell 15P
or Circular W/Strain-Relief
91-577049-15S Amphenol
JT06RE-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
JT06RT-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
MS27473E14F15S(SR)
1 83001157-1 Bushing for J1 Strain Relief, Sz 14
or
687-340-14 Glenair Inc.
F Portable SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-2

1 83000131 Connector, Size 10, 13-SKT,
or Crimp, Wall Mount (STD CLK)
MS27472E10A35S Cadmium Finish
MS27472E10B35S Olive Drab Finish
MS27472E10F35S Electroless Nickel Finish
1 83000558 Connector, Circular, Sz 16, 55 POS
or Crimp, Wall-Mount, (STD CLK)
MS27472E16A35S Cadmium Finish
MS27472E16B35S Olive Drab Finish
MS27472E16F35S Electroless Nickel Finish
Page 217
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. GPS Antenna Installation Kit P/N K12021
1 83217010 TNC Connector, 90° TNC
or
31-2381 Amphenol
1 83202010 TNC Connector, 90° TNC
or
KC-59-246 Kings Electronics
M39012/20-0003
1 83211018 Contact, Coax
or
225791-2 Amp
Page 218
34-60-22 1 May 2012
5. Required Tools
A. Crimping Tools Required
(1) UNS-1E & UNS-1C+ P1, P2 and P3 socket contacts: M22520/1-01.
(2) Portable SSDTU/DTU-100 panel-mounted socket contacts: M22520/2-01.
(3) GPS coaxial cable: no special tools required.
B. Insert/Extract Tools Required
(1) UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ P1, P2 and P3 socket contacts: Red/White, Military P/N
M81969/14-10 (Matrix P/N 6500-055-0020).
(2) Portable DTU-100 socket contacts: Gray/White, Military P/N M81969/14-01 (Matrix
P/N 6500-048-0022).
(3) GPS coaxial cable: no special tools required.
6. Wire and Cable Manufacturers
The following is a list of wire and cable manufacturers that can supply, but are not the only
sources of, multi-conductor cables for use during installations.
Name and Address Mailing Address Phone and Fax
A.E. Petsche Company, Inc. (817) 461-9473
2112 W. Division
Arlington, TX 76012
Calmont Engineering and (714) 549-0336
Electronics Corporation
420 E. Alton Ave.
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Electronic Cable Specialists P.O. Box 37497 (414) 421-5300
5300 W. Franklin Dr. Milwaukee, WI 53237-0497 Fax: (414) 421-5301
Franklin, WI 53132-8642
PIC Wire and Cable Supply, Inc. P.O. Box 330 (414) 246-0500
N63 W22619 Main St. Sussex, WI 53089-0330 (800) 742-3191
Sussex, WI 53089 Fax (414) 246-0450
Page 219
34-60-22 1 May 2012
7. Drawings
A. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+
FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW
2.87
APPROX
4.45
UNIVERSAL
APPROX
3.25 2.63
APPROX APPROX
6.380
5.250 5.000
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PRE
V 1 2 3
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N
BACK
0 MSG
O P Q R S T
ON/O
FF
DIM
±
U V W X Y Z ENTER
5.365
5.750
8.98
0.561
1.961
J3
Z
Y a b A
X t u v B
GG HH c C
W
V
s FF
NN JJ w d D
r EE e
PP
KK x E
U f
q DD y g F
T p MM LL
zh G
S
R
n
CC
BB AA
i H 6.260
Pm k l J
N M L K
2.250
J1
J2
Z Z
Y a b A Y a b A
X t u v B X t u v B
GG HH c C GG HH c C
W W
V
s FF
NN JJ w d D V
s FF
NN JJ w d D
r EE e r EE e
KK x x
PP PP
U E U KK E
q f q f
DD y g F DD y g F
T p MM LL T p MM LL
S CC zh G S CC zh G
n AA n AA
R BB
i H R BB
i H
Pm k l J Pm k l J
N M L K N M L K
1.491
1.728 2.279 0.525
REAR VIEW SIDE VIEW
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 8.1 LBS

3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12024
Page 220
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Viewing Angles for the UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ FMS
TOP VIEW
10
45
35
SIDE VIEW
NOTE: WHEN VIEWING TAWS ON THE UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ FMS, THE MAXIMUM BOTTOM VIEWING
ANGLE IS 25 DEGREES.
Page 221
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. Configuration Module Installation P/N 10171
0.375
0.369
0.56
UNS-1E/-1C+
The UNS-1E/-1C+ Configuration Module is normally mounted on, and becomes a part of the P1 connector strain relief.
The P1 connector is the right hand connector as viewed from the rear of the UNS-1E/-1C+. The configuration module wires should be
inserted into the P1 connector in accordance with the applicable wiring diagram prior to mounting the configuration module on the strain relief.
Install the configuration module as follows
1. Remove and discard the non-threaded half of the strain relief wire clamp.
2. Position the configuration module on the strain relief as shown in the illustration
and, using the screws and the threaded portion of the wire clamp, secure the wires as normal.
NOTE: It is permissible to mount the configuration module with the wires exiting toward the UNS-1E/-1C+. It is
also permissable to install it on the bottom of the strain relief.
It is also permissible, where space is limited, to not use the strain relief and to mount the
configuration module on or near the wire bundle.
Weight: 0.8. oz
Some early configuration modules were a slightly different shape but mounted in exactly the same manner.
Page 222
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. 5-Inch FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX
TOP VIEW
5.000
3.617
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

UNIVERSAL
6.380 6.260
5.250 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N
BACK
0 MSG
O P Q R S T
ON/OFF
DIM ±
U V W X Y Z ENTER
5.365 0.560
3.25
5.750
REAR VIEW
J3
J2
J1
NOTES:

3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12026-4
Page 223
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Viewing Angles for the 5-Inch FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XX3 (Mod 10)
TOP VIEW
10
45
35
SIDE VIEW
NOTE: WHEN VIEWING TAWS ON THE 5-INCH FPCDU, THE MAXIMUM BOTTOM VIEWING
ANGLE IS 25 DEGREES.
Page 224
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. 4-Inch FPCDU P/N 1117-( )
(1) P/N 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4
NOTE: Units without video and graphics capability (1117-1-X0X) will only have
the J1 connector. Units with video and graphics capability (1117-2-X1X)
will have all three connectors (J1, J2, and J3).
0.884
4.985
2.300
J1
BACK VIEW TOP VIEW
5.750 0.585 3.634

5.365 3.250
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
4.500 FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV 4.370

3.375
PREV LIST
NEXT A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
0.560 V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0
NOTES:
Page 225
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) P/N 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6
NOTE: Units without video and graphics capability (1117-1-X0X) will only have
the J1 connector. Units with video and graphics capability (1117-2-X1X)
will have all three connectors (J1, J2, and J3).
4.974
3.787
2.662
0.874
4.974
3.049
4.370
J3
2.300
J1
1.549
J2
TOP VIEW
BACK VIEW
5.750 3.634
0.585
5.365 3.250
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
4.500 FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV 4.370

3.375
PREV LIST
NEXT A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
0.560 V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0
NOTES:
Page 226
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Forward and Aft Mount Top View (P/N 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6)
X
MA
P/N 1117-X-XX5 and P/N 1117-X-XX6
G LE
AN
EW
VI
45 deg.
CENTER LINE
SCREEN BOUNDRY
45 deg.
VI
EW
AN
GL
E
MA
FWD AND AFT MOUNT
X
TOP VIEW
(4) Aft Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX5) MA

X
E
GL
AN
EW
VI
P/N 1117-X-XX5
35 deg.
SCREEN BOUNDRY
CENTER LINE
10 deg.
VIEW A
NGLE M
AX
AFT MOUNT - SIDE VIEW
Page 227
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) Forward Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX6)
P/N 1117-X-XX6
MAX
ANGLE
VIEW
10 deg.
CENTER LINE
SCREEN BOUNDRY
35 deg.
VI
EW
AN
GL
E
MA
X
FWD MOUNT - SIDE VIEW
Page 228
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. DTU-100 P/N 1406-01-1X
UNIVERSAL
5.750
2.250
0.562
7.762
1.88
3.60 0.38
5.00 2.124
DTU CONNECTOR
PIN IDENTIFICATION
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES L

A
L
A
K M B K M B
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 3.25 LBS J R N C J R N C
P P
H D H D
G F E G F E
J1 J2
Page 229
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. SSDTU P/N 1408-00-X
5.750
2.250
0.604
2.90
6.66
2.50 0.88
0.385
4.99 2.100
5.365
1.495 2.000
NOTES:
1.125 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
Page 230
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. ERP P/N 1015-1-XX (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 installations only)
5.0
4.44
0.562
5.75
RANGE HSI MAP TFC RDR NAV BRG TILT

1.12 1.00
0.562
UNIVERSAL
5.365
NOTES:
Page 231
34-60-22 1 May 2012
H. GPS/GNSS Antenna P/N 10705 and GPS Antenna 10706
#10-32UNF-2A X 1”
P/N MS51960-69
0.47
.63
TNC
CONNECTOR
0.63 DIA.
NITRILE O-RING
P/N MS28775-142
4.70 .75
1.600 3.00
.800
.70
.61 .230 DIA THRU

82 DEGREE C’SNK X .385
1.650 FAR SIDE, 4 PLS
.70 3.300
CAUTION: The required countersunk screws and O-ring are provided with the 10705 and
10706 antennas for installation. These recessed screws MUST be used to avoid
damage to the antenna housing.
NOTE: GPS Antenna, P/N 10706, may have been part of your system prior to upgrade. This
antenna will only support the GPS portion of the GPS/GNSS receiver. GPS Antenna,
P/N 10706, can be used for a GPS system only. Systems utilizing the GPS/GNSS
receiver must use GPS/GNSS Antenna P/N 10705.
Page 232
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Installation and Wiring

1. General
The basic Flight Management System architecture is shown in the Description and Operation
section for single and dual systems. Non-shielded wires are MIL-W-22759, and shielded
wires are MIL-W-27500 or equivalent.
A. Form - Dimensions and Communications
This FMS is designed to comply with the dimensional standards specified in ARINC
Specification 600, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces.
Inter-unit communications between navigation sensors/equipment and the FMS, as well as
between the FMS and the flight guidance system are transmitted and received in two-wire
ARINC 429 digital format. The digital ARINC 571 and 575 are also standard formats for
interface with Nav and Air Data systems. The FMS utilizes an aircraft mounted or portable
DTU-100 Data Transfer Unit or Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) connected through
a 10base-T Ethernet for data loading and downloading.
A representative listing of compatible sensors and systems, with which the FMS can
communicate, is in the tables showing Digital Inputs, Analog Inputs, Digital Outputs, and
Analog Outputs. Information about the formats/types of input and output data required and
used for each of the sensors/system is also indicated in the table.
The listings are used to determine and select compatible sensors/systems for use with the
FMS, and obtain data format/type information for system interconnection strapping when
installing the sensors/systems.
The FMS is configured to a specific aircraft installation by the use of a Configuration Module
that is a part of the aircraft P1 connector. At the time of installation, the configuration module
is programmed through keypad inputs to define the sensor input ports, fuel flow types, air
data type, EFIS interface, etc. A replacement FMS of both the same part number and SCN
can be installed without having to reprogram the FMS because the configuration module
retains the programmed information for the aircraft.
B. Sensor / Equipment Compatibility / Selection
When determining compatibility and selecting sensors, the following information applies:
The FMS is capable of receiving inputs from a variety of short and long-range sensors. The
signal input type from these sensors must be in a digital format to properly interface with the
FMS. The number of sensors the FMS is capable of using is determined by the type of FMS
and the number of available input ports. Some sensor inputs are port specific. This must be a
consideration when multiple sensor inputs are used.
(1) IRS or IRS/GPS Sensors
A maximum of three may be used configured in any order or combination. All IRS or
IRS/GPS sensors are to be of the same type.
Page 301
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) GPS Sensors
A maximum of three GPS sensors, including GLS, GNSS, GPS and Hybrid GPS and
IRS sensors may be used (including the internal GPS). These sensors can be
configured in any order or combination.
The FMS, in conjunction with either an internal GPS or an appropriate external GPS,
is certifiable for use as a primary means of navigation in remote/oceanic airspace
using GPS in accordance with the provisions of AC 20-138( ) Appendix I. There are
specific FMS hardware and software requirements as well as GPS hardware and
software requirements. Additionally, a RAIM prediction program is required to verify
that adequate integrity will exist for the proposed flight.
(3) RRS Sensor
An RRS may be used in place of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. (The RRS contains
the electronics of a multi-channel DME/TACAN receiver-transmitter with a VOR
receiver. The RRS is tuned remotely by the FMS using the ARINC 429 data bus.)
(4) RRS/RTU
The RRS and RTU can be installed and used in the same aircraft. The RRS provides
radio navigation inputs and the RTU is used for pilot command tuning of radios. In
the event of an RRS failure, the pilot must select CSDB tuning of the DME (if
installed) to allow uninterrupted DME-DME navigation.
The FMS provides optional radio tuning of COM, NAV, ADFs and transponders via
CSDB or ARINC 429, depending on radio manufacture and type. It may also be
dependent on the use of Universal’s Radio Tuning Unit (RTU). If an RTU is utilized,
the RTU software version must be compatible with the FMS software. Tuning of the
VHF NAV and DME for navigation does not require an external RTU because tuning
is handled by the FMS.
(5) Air Data
Air data must be supplied in ARINC 429 or 575 formats. If an analog air data
computer is installed in the aircraft, an Air Data Converter Unit (ACU) may be an
option. The ACU will convert the analog air data to ARINC 429. If the aircraft has no
TAS source, an air data computer must be installed.
The type of air data input (barometric altitude, pressure altitude or both) provided by
the air data source must be verified. The FMS must be configured to exactly match
these inputs. Both barometric altitude and pressure altitude must be configured if the
advanced performance option is enabled with the FMS.
The accuracy of the air data is also a consideration when the FMS will be certified for
VNAV or 3D coupled approaches. If the accuracy is not sufficient, then only lateral
approach operation will be possible.
Universal requires the use of barometric altitude. Without barometric altitude, SIDs
and STARs with altitude terminators and missed approach procedures cannot be
flown. Also, VNAV operation below 18,000 feet is not possible and the system is
limited to enroute navigation and 2D approaches only. Flight manual supplement
limitations will be required.
Page 302
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(6) ARINC Radio Tune Unit (ARTU)
The ARTU provides interface between the FMS and the Collins 429 radios using the
Collins RTU-870 Radio Tuning Unit. Radios may be tuned via the UASC FMS or the
Collins RTU-870. The UASC FMS and the Collins RTU-870 are interactive and no
external switching is required.
(7) Display Interfaces
Instrument display input signal type must be determined (either analog or digital) and
if digital, the format (ARINC 429, 561, 571) must also be determined.
(a) Universal’s Electronic Flight Instrument (EFI) and Multi-Function Display
(MFD)
Universal EFIs (ND/HSI and ADI) and MFD when interfaced with
Universal’s FMS are capable of correctly displaying navigation and flight plan
data. EFI and MFD displays give the operator the capability to select and
display needed information on demand as flight data changes occur.
(b) Electro-mechanical Instruments
Aircraft that incorporate electro-mechanical instruments may not have
autocourse slewing. This requires the flight crew to manually position the
course pointer to display desired track. Bearing pointers may also not be
compatible due to load problems and may require the addition of an amplifier.
(c) EFIS
CAUTION: IF 429 ADV IS PROGRAMMED WITHOUT A
COMPATIBLE EFIS, THE FLIGHT PLAN WILL BE
DRAWN INCORRECTLY. 429 GAMA MUST BE
PROGRAMMED WITH ANALOG INSTRUMENT
INTERFACES OR NON-COMPATIBLE EFIS.
Collins EFIS 85/86 status B-4, B-14, C-4, C-14, E-F, E-14 or Bendix/King
EFIS 40/50 (SG 65 symbol generators) or equivalent can be configured for
interface with the UNS-1C+/-1E by selecting 429 ADV when programming
the configuration module. When 429 ADV is selected, the EFIS will be
capable of correctly displaying a flight plan on the map display when the flight
plan contains a gap or procedural leg. The map display will draw the flight
plan line to the last fixed waypoint before the gap or procedural leg and end
there. The flight plan display will start again at the next fixed waypoint after
the gap and be drawn to the waypoints that follow.
When interfaced to EFIS displays the FMS must be correctly configured for
signal type (429 ADV, 429 GAMA, EDZ 705, 429 DHC, ASCB, etc.).
Display scaling must be addressed because not all EFIS displays meet the
necessary criteria for approaches. With ARINC 429 EFIS interfaces where the
EFIS is not compliant with TSO C-129 scaling requirements, the system may
be restricted to use of flight director steering only for terminal and approach
operations. The installer should discuss the issue with the certification agency
before proceeding with the installation. Analog and ARINC 561 displays
usually present no problems.
Page 303
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(8) Universal’s Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS)
When interfaced with a Universal FMS, the TAWS system is able to provide terrain
awareness information based on information from the FMS. The information from the
FMS provides TAWS with the ability to determine the aircraft’s state and intent and
provide caution and warning alerts. The FMS is capable of displaying maps and
symbology generated by TAWS. TAWS provides “Flight Plan Look Ahead” terrain
alerts by comparing the FMS flight plan to terrain databases.
(9) Radar
The FMS can be configured to accept input from one or two radar sensors. When two
radar sensors are used, one must be a Doppler radar and the other must be an ARINC
429, 571, or 1500 type radar. The FMS supports the following radar systems:
• Collins WXR-300 MFD
• Sperry Data Nav III
• Bendix Radar Nav IU-2023B
• Bendix Radar 1500 IU-1507A
• Racal Avionics Limited Doppler 91
• AN/ASN-137 Doppler
NOTE: For further compatibility information on specific equipment, refer to the
applicable sensor manual.
(10) Annunciators
Standard annunciations provided by the FMS are FMS HDG (heading), FMS SXTK
(selected crosstrack), MSG (message), WPT (waypoint), DR (dead reckoning) and
FMS APPR (approach). If utilizing GPS for approach or for GPS Primary Means of
Navigation, then GPS INTEG (GPS integrity) will be required. Universal’s FMS
outputs discretes for these annunciations. Annunciator signals are also provided on
the applicable busses for use in EFIS installations when desired. On EFIS systems
which display G/S (glideslope) in lieu of VNAV (vertical deviation) during FMS
approach mode, a PSEUDO ILS annunciator may be required to alert the flight crew
that the vertical display is FMS generated information and not sourced or provided
glideslope information. There may be minor variations to the actual nomenclature
displayed but the FMS modes must be in some way displayed and annunciated.
(11) Enroute Steering Interfaces
Many existing long-range navigation systems have been interfaced in the past to flight
guidance/autopilot systems via left/right deviation steering only. This was adequate
for those systems capable of only enroute navigation. However, new and advanced
systems require that roll steering be used. By using a roll command interface, the
FMS can provide steering for all procedural leg types including heading to altitude,
DME arcs, holding patterns, turn anticipation, procedure turns and other complex
maneuvers.
Page 304
34-60-22 1 May 2012
The FMS outputs roll command steering at 393 mV/deg for enroute and terminal
navigation and roll steering only approaches. Interface with flight director/autopilot
normally uses a designated LRN input to the F/D and A/P equipment or through the
HDG channel with external switching. F/D and A/P coupled operation utilizing L/R
deviation only is not recommended and is not certifiable.
If a designated LRN F/D and A/P input is not available (specifically the J.E.T. FC-
200 F/D and A/P) a Universal Steering Interface Unit (SIU) can be utilized to switch
the roll command steering signal to the F/D and A/P and properly scale the 393
mV/deg. The SIU will also command the necessary logic to annunciate the
appropriate modes of operation.
(12) Approach Functions and Options
Universal FMS systems have been certified in the United States and other countries
for GPS only, GPS overlay, VOR, VOR/DME, TACAN, RNAV and NDB non-
precision approaches using GPS as the navigation sensor. Approaches of these types
are contained in the FMS published navigation database include approach transitions
and missed approach segments. The FMS systems use GPS combined with other
navigation sensors and baro corrected altitude data to provide lateral and vertical
guidance from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the runway and then to the missed
approach and missed approach holding waypoints.
At approach initiation, when the approach mode is selected on the Control Display
Unit by the pilot, the GPS will remain selected when the approach definition data
used is contained within the FMS on-board published data base as an approved GPS
approach and the GPS being used is a C-129( ) Class A1/ B1 type sensor. If the
approach from the data base is not a published GPS approach then the sensor will
automatically be deselected at approach initiation.
Generally there are two ways of installing Universal’s FMS for approach operations.
It must be decided how the FMS is to be certified concerning approaches; whether or
not the FMS approach capability will be roll steering only, or roll steering with
VDEV displayed, or fully 3D coupled. This determination will dictate which
additional annunciation(s) will be required to be added to the cockpit for certification,
which strapping will be required on certain EFIS systems, etc.
The first option is to provide 2D coupled (along track and crosstrack) operation using
the roll steering input channel to the FGS. The approach gain for the roll steering
output from the FMS is configurable to provide a more aggressive path following for
approaches. A gain of ’3X’ is recommended. The FGS will remain in NAV mode; the
FMS will steer the approach transition segments and final approach using the same
roll steering command input that is used for enroute operations. In this case, it is very
desirable to provide a vertical display on the HSI of the pseudo glideslope VNAV
deviation. Coupled vertical approach will not be possible with this interface design
and it will be up to the flight crew to make the descent using another FGS mode.
From an interface standpoint, this is the simplest method to interface for approaches.
The limitation of this interface is the lack of coupled vertical ILS-like operation.
Some installations such as the LR-60, LR-31, Dash 8, Falcon 2000 and Astra SPX do
use pitch command for approach mode but this is not the typical scenario for retrofit
installations.
Page 305
34-60-22 1 May 2012
The second way of interfacing the FMS for approach involves 3D fully coupled
pseudo ILS approaches. This is accomplished by switching FMS analog lateral and
vertical deviation signals in place of real ILS data to the HSI and FGS. During the
approach transition segments with NAV mode selected on FGS and LRN selected for
display, the FMS (established inbound and less than 0.2 NM cross track for auto-
activation) the FMS approach active annunciator output from the FMS is used to
provide relay logic to switch the FMS deviation to the HSI and FGS along with
simulated Tune-to-Localizer. FMS lateral and vertical deviations are switched to the
FGS and approach arm/capture functions are available for F/D and A/P operation.
The HSI and FGS will use the simulated ILS and thus ILS control laws of the FGS are
used. This generally results in approaches with better path following than roll steering
approaches. This type of installation obviously adds complexity and requires detailed
description in the AFM supplement as well as proper aircrew training.
Page 306
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Digital Input Compatible Sensors and Equipment
From FMS Compatible Data Format / Type
Remarks
Sensor/Equipment ARINC Other
IRS
Honeywell Laseref/Lasernav 429 HS –
Litton LTN-92 429 HS – Depends on mods included.
Delco Carousel IRS 429 LS &571 –
Litton LTN-72-R, 72 RL 571 –
LORAN C SYSTEMS (LCS)
Universal LCS 429 LS –
Universal LCS-850 429 LS –
ONI-7000 (NOTE 1) 429 LS – ONI CDU must be retained.
ADC
Collins ADC-80 (NOTE 2) 575 – ADC80K or Collins equivalent.
Collins ADC-850 429 LS –
Sperry ADZ-800 / 810-( ) 429 LS –
IDC Modified TAS 429 LS –
B & D TAS Plus 2600 Series 429 LS –
B & D 2800/90004 Series 429 LS –
UASC ACU 429 LS –
UASC ADS-550 429 LS –
DME
Bendix DM-441( ) 429 LS –
Collins DME-42 – CSDB
Collins DME-442 429 LS CSDB
Foster DME-670 or TX-670 429 LS –
VOR
Bendix VN-411 ( ) 429 LS –
Collins VIR-32 – CSDB
Collins VIR-432 429 CSDB
TACAN
UASC-RRS 429 LS –
TCN 500 429 –
ARN 118 429 –
ARN-154-39 429 –
RRS
Universal UASC-RRS 429 LS –
FUEL FLOW (up to four engines) 429 LS Labels 247 and 347
GPS
Universal GPS-1000 429 LS –
Universal GPS-1200 429 LS –
Universal GNSS-2400 429 LS –
Honeywell GPIRU 429 LS or HS –
Honeywell GPIRS 429 HS –
FMS XFILL 429 HS – Private data
Page 307
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Digital Input Compatible Sensors and Equipment (continued)
From FMS Compatible Data Format / Type
Remarks
RADAR / RADAR INTERFACE/ MFD /
DOPPLER –
Collins WXR-844, -854 571 – Joystick operation
Sperry Data Nav III 571 –
Sperry Data Nav IV 561 –
Sperry MG-600/800 Series 429/561 –
Bendix Radar Nav IU-2023B 429 LS –
Bendix Radar Nav (429 type) 429 LS –
Bendix Radar 1500 429 LS – Requires digital altitude source
CMC 2012 Doppler 429 LS –
Racal Avionics Limited 429 LS –
Doppler 91 (NOTE 3)
–
ASN-137 Doppler (NOTE 3) 429 LS –
I/O CONCENTRATOR
Collins ADC-850 429 HS – ONSIDE Pro Line 4-XX bus
Collins WXR-300 MFD 571 – Joystick Operation, Pro Line 4-XX bus
Collins WXR-844 429 HS – Joystick Operation, Pro Line 4-XX bus
Collins WXR-854 429 HS – Joystick Operation, Pro Line 4-XX bus
CABIN DISPLAY
CD-2000 429 HS
UniVision 429 HS
UL-600 UniLink 429 LS/HS RS-422 Speeds are configurable
TAWS 429-1 HS Must be enabled by configuration
EFIS/MFD (Refer to table of FMS Outputs)
NOTES: 1. Part number and software must be correct. Refer to the applicable sensor manual.
2. Must be specified for the type of aircraft and have both TAS and altitude data.
3. The UNS-1C+/E must be supplied with digital pitch and roll from AHRS or IRS/IRGPS when
interfaced to Doppler 91 or AN/ASN-137 Doppler.
Page 308
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. Digital Output Compatible Sensors and Equipment
To FMS Compatible Data Format / Type
Remarks
IRS/INS
Honeywell Laseref/Lasernav 429 LS –
Litton LTN-72 571 –
Litton LTN-90 429 LS –
Litton LTN-92 429 LS –
Delco Carousel IRS 429 LS – Depends on mods included.
Delco Carousel IRS 571 – Depends on mods included.
Loran C System (LCS)
Universal LCS 429 LS –
Universal LCS-850 429 LS –
ONI-7000 429 LS – Specific P/N RCU only, must retain its
CDU
RADAR / RADAR INTERFACE / MFD
Sperry Data Nav III 571 – Nine waypoints
Sperry Data Nav IV 561 – Three waypoints
Sperry MG-600 / 800 Series 429/561 – Depends on MG Part No.
Bendix Radar Nav (429 type) 429 LS –
Bendix Radar Nav IU-2023B 571 – Nine waypoints
Racal Avionics Limited Discretes
Doppler 91 (NOTE 1)
RADIOS (NOTE 2)
DME (Tune)
Bendix DM-441 429 LS – Type RZ
Collins DME-42 – CSDB
Collins DME-442 429 LS CSDB
VOR (Tune)
Collins VIR-32 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
Collins VIR-432 – CSDB Entered commands
Bendix VN-411 429
ADF (Tune)
Collins ADF-60 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
Collins ADF-462 – CSDB entered commands (NOTE 3)
COMM (Tune)
Collins VHF-21 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
Collins VHF-22 – CSDB entered commands (NOTE 3)
Collins VHF-422 – CSDB
TRANSPONDER
Collins TDR-90 w/CAD-62 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
entered commands to ARTU (talks to
Collins TDR-90 w/CAD-870 CSDB CAD)
Collins TDR-94 429LS
CONTROL HEADS
Collins CTX-XX / Pro Line II – CSDB
Gables Type 814 – CSDB Depends on model
Page 309
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. Digital Output Compatible Sensors and Equipment (continued)
Remarks
RRS
Universal RRS 429 LS – (NOTE 4)
GPS
Universal GPS 1000 429 LS – TSO C115a
Universal GPS 1200 429 LS – TSO C129 Class B1/C1
Honeywell GPSSU 429 LS or HS – TSO C129 Class B1/C1
Honeywell IRS / GPS 429 HS –
AFIS
Global/Wulfsberg 429 LS – Mods may be required
HSI
Collins 331A-9G 561 – Six Wire
Sperry RD-650 561 – Six Wire (DIST only) (NOTE 5)
TAWS 429 HS
EFIS/AUTOPILOT SYSTEMS
BENDIX
EFIS-40 / 50 571 – +Analog RCS (NOTE 6)
EFIS-10 429 LS –
COLLINS
AP 105 / 5M5 – – No forced ROLL steering. (NOTE 7)
APS 65 – –
APS 80 / 85 – –
EHSI-74 561 – (All data) (NOTE 8)
EFIS-85A / B 561 – +Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 8)
EFIS-86A 561 – +Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 8)
EFIS-85B(4 / 14) 429 –
EFIS-85E(4) 429 –
EFIS-86C(14) 429 –
EFIS-871 429HS –
FCS-850 429HS –
JET
FC 110 – – No RCS channel. (NOTE 9)
FC 200 – – No RCS channel. (NOTE 10)
FC 530 – – Force capture available
Page 310
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. Digital Output Compatible Sensors and Equipment (continued)
Remarks
EFIS/AUTOPILOT SYSTEMS (Cont.)
HONEYWELL
EDZ-705 EFIS 429 –
EDZ 801
SG-801 561 – + Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 8)
MG-801 561 + Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 8)
EDZ 803
MG-803 429 LS – Map data only
EDZ 805
SG-805 429 – HS or LO (All data)
MG-805 429 – HS or LO (All data)
EDZ 8000
EDZ 810 429 – HS or LO (All data)
EDZ 811
SPZ 200 – w/o LNAV mode on panel
RNZ-850 CSDB
NOTES: 1. The FMS must be supplied with pitch and roll from AHRS or IRS/IRGPS when interfaced to Doppler
91
2. RS-422 NRZ data format for all CSDB listings.
3. Not auto-tuned by FMS (requires installation of RTU).
4. Used in place of DME / VOR / TACAN receiver.
5. LRN DIS w/ARINC 568 Label 201
6. EFIS requires separate demodulator to accept DC STEER.
7. Must have open DEV input at AP 105/5M5 to force capture RCS.
8. Standard six wire data.
9. No FMS HDG mode operation
10. The Universal SIU (P/N 92-7009-1) must be used to provide roll steering to the FC-200 to take full
advantage of the flight guidance features and capabilities available from the UNS C+/E FMS. These
features include GPS operation throughout all phases of flight, SIDs, STARs, Heading Mode, Holding
Patterns and a 3D Approach Mode that provides ILS-like guidance for GPS, GPS-overlay, RNAV,
VOR, VOR-DME approaches - IFR Certified.
Page 311
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. Analog Inputs
From FMS Compatible General Information - Format / Type / Etc.
Sensor/Equipment DC AC DIS Voltage Range Remarks
FUEL FLOW (4 separate inputs)
DC Analog (NOTE 3) DC 0-5 VDC Compatible transducers in
0-8 VDC this range:
0-12 VDC
AC Analog (NOTE 3) AC 0-5 VAC RMS AC Pickoff
0-8 VAC RMS
Pulse (NOTE 4) AC Frequency and Width
NAV / INSTRUMENTS
Instrument Synchro Reference AC 26 VAC 400 Hz Hdg, Brg to Wpt &
Desired Track
Steering Reference AC 26 VAC 400 Hz F/D-A/P Roll Command
Synchro Heading AC Standard ARINC 407 3 Wire Xmtr
Synchro Heading Valid DC DIS 28 VDC 28 VDC Valid
Synchro Heading Select DC DIS 28 VDC/Open Open = Mag
Mag/True Output Control DIS Ground/Open Open = Mag
Alternate Mag/True Out Control DC DIS 28 VDC/Open Open = Mag
VNAV Scaling Options DIS Ground/Open Open = Normal
Ground = Sperry Type
MISCELLANEOUS
APU Fuel Flow Discrete 1/2 DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
APU Fuel Flow Discrete 2/2 DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
APU Running DIS Ground/Open
ATC1 Select DIS Ground/Open
Strut Switch DIS Ground/Open Open-Air / Gnd-Gnd
Analog Out Test DIS Ground/Open Gnd - Active
Sperry VNAV Capture DIS Ground/Open Gnd - Capture
Frequency Management DIS Ground/Open
DHC VNAV Arm DIS 28V/Ground
DHC VNAV Coupled DIS Ground/Open
Door DIS Ground/Open
ARINC 561 DTG Resolution DIS Ground/Open
Engine 1 Running DIS Ground/Open
Mark on Target (90X.X) DIS 28V/Open (NOTES 1, 2)
FPL Erase (90X.X) DIS Ground/Open (NOTE 2)
Go Around DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Magnetic/True Switch DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Parking Brake Set DIS Ground/Open
Reversion Tune Enable DIS Ground/Open
Rotors Turning DIS Ground/Open
Test DIS Ground/Open
Page 312
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. Analog Inputs (continued)
From FMS Compatible
Sensor/Equipment General Information - Format / Type / Etc.
INPUT POWER (Maximum)
DC DC +28 VDC 50W max. Aircraft Primary
DC (battery) DC +28 VDC 50W max. Backup/Auxiliary
AC AC 26 VAC 400 Hz, 1 VA
NOTES: 1. The FPL Erase signal must be active for 3 seconds before the flight plan is erased
2. This signal is available only in Special Missions
3. 970 kOhms Differential; High side impedance 470 kOhms, Low side Impedance 470 kOhms.
4. Pulse frequency fuel flows will have a scaling of 1-400.0 pph/Hz while Pulse Width fuel flows will be in the
range of 1-400.0 pph/msec. The required accuracy for Pulse Width and Pulse Frequency signals will be
sufficient to measure signals in the input range 1-800 msec or 1-2000 Hz with an accuracy of 1%.
Page 313
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. Analog Outputs
General Information - Format / Type / Etc.
Sensor / Equipment
DC AC DIS Voltage Range Remarks
VERTICAL DEV &
DC 0-250 mVDC Linear
LATERAL XTRK DEV
0-2 VDC Linear
VERTICAL DEV, HIGH LEVEL DC
7.5 VDC Flag Stow
12 V
ROLL STEERING COMMAND AC 0.393 Vac/Deg.
400 Hz max.
SYNCHRO/RESOLVER AC 0-11 Vac Std ARINC 407
400 Hz
0-9 Vac Std Resolver
400 Hz
FLAGS DC 4 180-250 mVDC Except below
Lateral
Vertical
TO/FROM
VALIDS DC DIS
Vertical Valid 28 VDC
Steering Valid 28 VDC
Nav Valid 28 VDC
Digital Valid 28 VDC
Pitch Command Valid 28 VDC
ANNUNCIATORS DC DIS Ground/Open
SXTK Ground/Open
DR Ground/Open
Message Ground/Open
WPT Alert Ground/Open
GPS Integrity Ground/Open
FMS HDG Ground/Open
FMS Valid 28 VDC/Open
FMS Approach Ground/Open
EFIS / MFD (Refer to table of FMS Input / Outputs)
AC PITCH STEERING AC +7500 mV
DC PITCH STEERING DC +7500 mV
Approach Annunciator DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
DHC Arm Annunciator DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
DHC VNAV Engage Request DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Doppler Mode DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Doppler Sea State DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Doppler Self Test DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Dead Reckoning Mode DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
FMS Valid DIS 28V/Open
GPS Integrity DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Heading Annunciator DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
PL4 FMS 1 NV DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
PL4 FMS 2 NV DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Selected Crosstrack Annunciator DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Sperry VNAV FLAG DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Waypoint Annunciator DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
VNAV Waypoint Annunciator DIS Ground/Open or 28V/Open
Page 314
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. FMS Inputs/Outputs
Data Format/Type
To/From Sensor/Equipment Remarks
ARINC Other
BENDIX
EFIS-40 / 50 571 – +Analog RCS .(NOTE 1)
EFIS-10 429 LS –
COLLINS
AP 105 / 5M5 - – No forced ROLL steering. (NOTE 2)
APS 65 - –
APS 80 / 85 - –
EHSI-74 561 – (All data) (NOTE 3)
EFIS-85A / B 561 – +Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 3)
EFIS-86A 561 – +Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 3)
EFIS-85B(4 / 14) 429 –
EFIS-85E(4) 429 –
EFIS-86C(14) 429 –
EFIS-871 429HS –
FCS-850 429HS –
JET
FC 110 - – No RCS channel. (NOTE 4)
FC 200 - – No RCS channel. (NOTE 5)
FC 530 - – Force capture available
HONEYWELL
EDZ-705 EFIS 429 –
EDZ 801
MG-801 561 – + Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (NOTE 3)
EDZ 803
MG-803 429 LS – Map data only
EDZ 805
EDZ 8000
EDZ 810 429 – HS or LO (All data)
EDZ 811
RNZ-850 CSDB
NOTES: 1. EFIS requires separate demodulator to accept DC STEER.
2. Must have open DEV input at AP 105/5M5 to force capture RCS.
3. Standard six wire data.
4. No FMS HDG mode operation
5. The Universal SIU (P/N 92-7009-1) must be used to provide roll steering to the FC-200 to take full
advantage of the flight guidance features and capabilities available from the UNS C+/E FMS. These
features include GPS operation throughout all phases of flight, SIDs, STARs, Heading Mode, Holding
Patterns and a 3D Approach Mode that provides ILS-like guidance for GPS, GPS-overlay, RNAV, VOR,
VOR-DME approaches - IFR Certified.
Page 315
34-60-22 1 May 2012
H. Electrical Connectors
The FMS uses three size 24 - 61-pin connectors. Each connector has a different shell
polarization to ensure proper mating of each plug and socket set. The GPS/GNSS antenna
coaxial cable is fitted with either a straight or a 90-degree connector at the FMS end. The
portable DTU-100 uses two size 10 - 13-pin connector.
I. Remote Annunciators
The FMS provides outputs to remotely mounted panel annunciators. These include remote
Message, Waypoint Alert, Selected Crosstrack, GPS Integrity, FMS Heading and FMS
Approach advisories.
In addition, a “System On” discrete output is available to the installer for use in activating
remote switching (if required).
J. FMS Installation Considerations
The FMS is instrument or pedestal mounted using standard configuration Dzus rails.
Consideration should be given to the depth of the FMS, the GPS/GNSS coaxial cable and
wire bundles when planning installation.
CAUTION: MATING CONNECTORS FOR FMS REAR CONNECTORS P1, P2
AND P3 ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE. THEY ARE INDEXED
DIFFERENTLY. BE SURE THAT THE CORRECT CONNECTOR IS
USED ON THE END OF EACH WIRE BUNDLE. KEYING: P1 = A,
P2 = NORMAL AND P3 = D.
The Configuration Module is mounted directly onto the P1 connector strain relief. Refer to
Configuration Module Installation drawing in the Equipment Specifications section of this
manual.
K. GPS/GNSS Antenna Mounting
(1) Installation Considerations
The antenna should be mounted on top of the fuselage near the cockpit. Avoid
mounting the antenna near any projections, the propeller, the T-Tail, and minimize
shadowing by the wing during maneuvers. The antenna should also be located with
proper spacing to other system antennas such that no performance degradation will
occur due to shadowing of signals and/or RF interference.
Minimum Antenna Separation
Antennas Distances
GPS-GPS 12 inches
GPS-SATCOM (INMARSAT, 1625 MHz) 4 feet
GPS-all other antennas 4 feet
Page 316
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) Installation Instructions
Total attenuation losses due to antenna cabling and connections must not exceed the
minimum recommended specifications listed below. Attenuation losses will vary
depending on the type of RF cable connected to the antenna. The gain of the
antenna/preamplifier minus the loss of the cable ends connectors should be between
20 (minimum) and 30 dB for optimum performance. For instance, if the GPS is being
connected to antenna P/N 10705, which has a maximum gain of 38 dB, total
attenuation losses, must not exceed 18 dB. For optimum performance, it is actually
preferable not to exceed 10 to 15 dB of cable loss for this example to ensure a
minimum 20 dB of gain from the antenna input to the GPS sensor.
It is also highly recommended that only high quality, low-loss cable such as ECS or
PIC RG-142, RG-400 or equivalent coax cable is used in the installation. Refer to the
following table for the maximum allowable cable loss specifications based on the
amount of antenna gain.
Gain/Loss Specifications
Antenna Part Number Antenna Gain Maximum Cable Loss
10705 38 ± 2 dB 18 dB
10706 30 ± 2 dB 10 dB
Mechanical structure modifications to install GPS antenna(s) should be carried out in

accordance with the guidelines of FAA Advisory Circular AC 43.13. Installation of
the antenna, its electrical bonding to the structure, coaxial cable routing and clamping
should also be accomplished per this advisory. Refer to the antenna installation
drawing contained in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual for detailed
information.
The design of the GPS antenna is such that a ground plane is required. To assure
maximum protection from a possible lightning strike, the antenna base should
conduct to the mounting surface. This can be accomplished by removing paint in the
area of contact between the antenna base and the aircraft skin.
The hole for TNC connector should be about 0.75 inch diameter. Make the smallest
practical hole in the pressure vessel.
Fasten the antenna with four screws of sufficient length to assure that at least two full
threads protrude beyond the locking nut or threaded backing plate (if used). Apply a
maximum torque of 10 in. lbs. to avoid cracking the plastic radome of the antenna.
Apply a sealant (RTV is recommended) over screw heads and around the periphery of
the antenna to exclude moisture.
Check bonding of the antenna to the aircraft skin by measuring the resistance between
the skin of the aircraft and the antenna connector housing using a shunt-type
ohmmeter such as a Wheatstone Bridge or Kelvinometer. There should be no more
than 100 milliohms resistance measured. This measurement is accomplished from the
inside of the aircraft with the antenna installed.
Page 317
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Long Cable Runs
In installations with very long cable runs, it is permissible to use a low loss coax
cable (such as Electronic Cable Specialists P/N 311501) for the run from the antenna
to a bulkhead connector. Then use a smaller coax (such as ECS P/N 3C3160
M17/113-RG316) from the bulkhead connector to the UNS-1C+/-1E. Components
for this application are listed below.
Coax cable P/N 311501 3C3160
Attenuation 1.575 GHz = 0.087 dB/ft. 1.575 GHz = 0.405 dB/ft.
Minimum Bend Radius 1.22 in. (nominal) 1.02 in. (nominal)
RF Connectors P/Ns
TNC Straight CTS922 31-2315-1000
TNC 90º CTR922 KA-59-281
Bulkhead TNC BTS922 N/A
BNC Straight CBS922 225395-7
BNC 90º CBR922 KC-59-318
Complete FMS GPS cable assemblies as well as bulk coax cable and connectors
are available from Electronic Cable Specialists. Refer to Wire and Cable
Manufacturers in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual.
Page 318
34-60-22 1 May 2012
L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)
Installation Considerations
The SSDTU is available in two models, a fixed installation model that is permanently
installed in the aircraft and a portable model which is carried into the aircraft, attached to an
interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed prior to flight. The SSDTU is the
same fit as a DTU-100.
The SSDTU may be used as a replacement for a DTU-100 and can be directly installed
without any modifications to the aircraft or wiring using connector P1, which allows the use
of a single Ethernet connection. If the aircraft is wired for the DTU-100 using four Ethernet
ports, connector P2 must be replaced with connector P/N 83000255 which is included in the
SSDTU installation kit P/N K12079-1, no additional wiring is needed. To have all eight
Ethernet ports available on the SSDTU, the P2 connector must be replaced and additional
wiring must be installed.
If the aircraft is wired for a Portable DTU-100, use the wiring harness (P/N 81304072) to
connect bulkhead connector P1 to the Portable SSDTU J1 and the retrofit wiring harness
(P/N 81140811) to connect bulkhead P2 to J2 of the Portable SSDTU. This allows one
Ethernet connection on P1 and three Ethernet connections on P2. For the additional four
Ethernet ports to be available to the Portable SSDTU, the existing P2 bulkhead connector
must be replaced with connector P/N 83000558 and additional wiring must be installed.
Refer to the applicable pin identification tables and wiring diagrams in this section.
J1 Pin Crossover
SSDTU SSDTU DTU-100 DTU-100
Functions Pins Functions Pins
EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) A RS-422 A A
EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) B RS-422 B B
Ethernet #1 RX (+) C Ethernet #0 RX (+) C
Ethernet #1 RX (-) D Ethernet #0 RX (-) D
Ethernet #1 Shield E Ethernet #0 Shield E
Ethernet #1 TX (+) F Ethernet #0 TX (+) F
Ethernet #1 TX (-) G Ethernet #0 TX (-) G
H Option Pin 0 H
J Option Pin 1 J
K K
Chassis Ground L Chassis Ground L
Power 28 VDC M Power 28 VDC M
EIA-232 RX N Aux Port RX (RS-232 RX) N
Ground P Ground P
EIA-232 TX R Aux Port TX (RS-232 TX) R
Page 319
34-60-22 1 May 2012
J2 Pin Crossover
NOTE: Pin numbers/letters not listed are not used or assigned any function.
SSDTU SSDTU DTU-100 DTU-100
Functions Pins Functions Pins
Ethernet #3 RX (+) 1 Ethernet #2 RX (+) E
Ethernet #3 TX (+) 2 Ethernet #2 TX (+) G
Ethernet #2 RX (-) 4 Ethernet #1 RX (-) B
Ethernet #3 RX (-) 6 Ethernet #2 RX (-) F
Ethernet #3 TX (-) 7 Ethernet #2 TX (-) H
Ethernet #4 TX (-) 8 Ethernet #3 TX (-) N
Ethernet #4 TX (+) 9 Ethernet #3 TX (+) L
Ethernet #2 TX (-) 10 Ethernet #1 TX (-) D
Ethernet #2 RX (+) 11 Ethernet #1 RX (+) A
Ethernet #3 Shield 13
Ethernet #4 RX (-) 15 Ethernet #3 RX (-) K
Ethernet #4 RX (+) 16 Ethernet #3 RX (+) J
Ethernet #2 TX (+) 18 Ethernet #1 TX (+) C
Ethernet #2 Shield 19 Ethernet Shield P
Ethernet #8 TX (-) 27
Ethernet #8 RX (-) 28
Ethernet #5 TX (+) 31
Ethernet #8 RX (+) 36
Page 320
34-60-22 1 May 2012
2. FMS Interfaces
Interconnection wiring information between the aircraft, FMS, CDU, DTU is provided in the
following paragraphs and wiring diagrams. Information about the connection to VOR, DME,
TACAN, radar, flight control and fuel flow systems is provided in the FMS Interface
Manual, 34-60-27. Configuration of the FMS can be found in the FMS Configuration
Manual, 34-60-26
A. Analog Inputs
Output Description Plug/Pin Characteristics Notes
Autopilot Reference J1-P H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz 2
J1-R (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
(Input Voltage: 26 VAC RMS ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80 kΩ (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Fuel Flow #1 J1-A (A) Depends on Configuration 2
J1-B (B)
Fuel Flow #2 J1-C (A) Depends on Configuration 2
J1-D (B)
Fuel Flow #3 J2-i (A) Depends on Configuration 2
J2-j (B)
Fuel Flow #4 J3-CC (A) Depends on Configuration 2
J3-DD (B)
Heading Synchro J1-X (X) Impedance = 33 kΩ 2
J1-Y (Y) Impedance = 33 kΩ
J1-Z (Z) Impedance = 24 kΩ
Standard ARINC 407 three-wire synchro
transmitter (or equivalent) with two-wire
reference signal from aircraft compass
system.
Heading Synchro Reference J1-K (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz 2
J1-L (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
Input Voltage: 26 VAC RMS ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Instrument Synchro Reference J1-M (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz 1
J1-N (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
Input Voltage: 26 VAC RMS ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 ma (maximum)
NOTES: 1. Available in Analog configuration FMSs, P/Ns 2017-XX-X1X, 2017-XX-X5X or
10172-XX-X1X, 10172-XX-X5X only.
2. Available on all UNS-1C+/-1E FMS configurations.
Page 321
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. Discrete Inputs
Input Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
Discrete Input 1 J3-T Ground / Open (Configurable)
See System Data Installation for list of
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 2 J1-MM Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 3 J1-LL Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 4 J1-DD Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 5 J1-AA Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 6 J1-CC Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 7 J1-GG Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 8 J3-R Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 9 J3-P Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 10 J3-S 28 VDC / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 11 J3-h Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
FMS #2 J1-EE Ground / Open (Ground = FMS #2)
FMS #3 J1-FF Ground / Open (Ground = FMS #3)
Heading Input MAG/TRUE J1-HH 28 VDC / Open
(Open = MAG / 28 VDC = TRUE)
Heading Input Valid J1-V 28 VDC / Open
Power Control J2-FF Ground / Open (FMS Power On/Off)
Page 322
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Digital Inputs
(1) ASCB Inputs (P/Ns 10172-XX-X3X and 2017-XX-X3X)
ASCB provides the FMS with an interface to the ASCB Version-A databus developed
by Honeywell and supplement the ARINC, CSDB, and analog interfaces of the FMS.
ASCB Discrete In 1 J1-N
ASCB Discrete In 2 J1-M
ASCB Discrete In 3 J2-w
ASCB Discrete In 4 J2-PP
ASCB Discrete In 5 J2-e
ASCB Discrete In 6 J2-f
ASCB Discrete In 7 J2-MM
ASCB Discrete In 8 J2-LL
ASCB A Clock 1 + J2-z
ASCB A Clock 1 - J2-g
ASCB A Data 1 + J2-x
ASCB A Data 1 - J2-y
ASCB B Clock 2 + J3-E
ASCB B Clock 2 - J3-F
ASCB B Data 2 + J2-v
ASCB B Data 2 - J2-HH
Page 323
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) CSDB Inputs
Some sensors are restricted to certain input ports. The allowable CSDB port
assignments and their pin numbers are found in the WAAS FMS Configuration
Manual, 34-60-26.
Receive From External CDU #2 (Note) J1-p (A) External CDU
J1-q (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 1 J1-w (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-x (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 2 J1-y (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-z (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 3 J1-u (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-v (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 4 J3-p (A) Depends on Configuration
J3-q (B)
NOTE: CDU #2 In is for communication with a remote CDU. There are no external
connections between the NCU and CDU #1 because they are packaged in the
same unit.
Page 324
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) ARINC Input Ports
Some sensors are restricted to certain input ports. The allowable ARINC port
assignments and their pin numbers are found in the FMS Configuration
Manual, 34-60-26.
Port Plug/Pin Input Description Notes
0 J1-a (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 1
J1-b (B)
1 J1-c (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS)
J1-d (B)
2 J1-e (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS)
J1-f (B)
3 J1-g (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS)
J1-h (B)
4 J3-EE (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-FF (B)
5 J3-GG (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-HH (B)
6 J3-JJ (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-KK (B)
7 J3-LL (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-MM (B)
8 J1-N (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 2
J1-M (B)
9 J2-w (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 2
J2-PP (B)
10 J1-W (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 2
J1-s (B)
11 J2-t (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 2
J2-r (B)
12 J1-NN (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 2
J1-PP (B)
13 J2-GG (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 2
J2-NN (B)
14 J2-v (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 2
J2-HH (B)
15 J3-E (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 2
J3-F (B)
NOTES: 1. If the FMS contains an internal GPS, the GPS output is internally connected to ARINC
Input Port 0. Port 0 must be configured to GPS n B1 where n represents 1 for FMS #1
or 2 for FMS #2.
2. Available in Dual ARINC configuration FMSs, P/Ns 2017-XX-X2X or 10172-XX-X2X
only.
Page 325
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. Analog Outputs
Desired Track J2-e (X) Synchro X 1
J2-f (Y) Synchro Y
J2-g (Z) Synchro Z
Lateral Deviation Normal Level 1
J2-KK (H) +R -250 to +250 mVDC
J2-LL (L) +L
High Level
J2-KK (H) +R +6 to -6 VDC
J2-LL (L) +L (2 Dot Voltage)
Pitch Command J3-E (H) AC or DC pitch 1
J3-F (L) Pitch Return
Roll Steering J2-AA (H) 0.393 VAC RMS/Degree 2
J2-BB (L) Right Roll in Phase
To/From J2-MM (H) + To 180-250 mV Output 1
J2-NN (L) + From
Vertical Deviation Normal Level 1
J2-GG (H) +Up +1 to -1 VDC
J2-HH (L) +Down
High Level
J2-GG (H) +Up -2 to +2 VDC
J2-HH (L) +Down (2 Dot Voltage)
Waypoint Bearing/Drift Angle J2-x (X) Synchro X 1
J2-y (Y) Synchro Y
J2-z (Z) Synchro Z
NOTES: 1. Available in Analog configuration FMSs, P/Ns 2017-XX-X1X, 2017-XX-X5X or
10172-XX-X1X, 10172-XX-X5X only.
2. Available on all UNS-1C+/-1E FMS configurations.
Page 326
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. Discrete Outputs
All discrete outputs, except the NAV Flag and Vertical Flag, are of two types: Ground/Open
and 28VDC/Open. Both the Ground/Open and 28VDC/Open discrete outputs may be either
configurable or non-configurable. Non-configurable discretes must be assigned to a specific
pin. Configurable discretes may be assigned to any one of a specific set of pins.
Message Annunciator Output J2-U Ground / Open (GND = Message, 350mA
is the maximum allowable load)
Nav Valid J2-DD 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid) 1
Pitch Command Valid J3-G 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid) 1
Steering Valid J2-CC 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Vertical Valid J2-JJ 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid) 1
Discrete Output 1 J3-i Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 2 J2-W Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 3 J2-V Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 4 J2-S Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 5 J2-T Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 6 J3-n Ground / Open(Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 7 J3-m Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 8 J2-Y Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
Discrete Output 9 J2-EE 28 VDC / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs
NOTE: 1. Available in Analog configuration FMSs, P/Ns 2017-XX-X1X, 2017-XX-X5X, 10172-XX-X1X and
10172-XX-X5X only.
Page 327
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. Digital Outputs
The following tables show a list of the configurable CSDB and ARINC 429 outputs along
with the ports to which they default when the configuration module is initialized. Each of
these ports is configurable.
Some sensors are restricted to certain output ports. The allowable ARINC port assignments
and their pin numbers are found in the WAAS FMS Configuration Manual, 34-60-26.
(1) ASCB Inputs (P/Ns 10172-XX-X3X and 2017-XX-X3X)
ASCB provides the FMS with an interface to the ASCB Version-A databus developed
by Honeywell and supplement the ARINC, CSDB, and analog interfaces of the FMS.
Output Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
ASCB Discrete Out 1 J2-t
ASCB Discrete Out 2 J2-r
ASCB Discrete Out 3 J2-JJ
ASCB Discrete Out 4 J2-KK
ASCB Discrete Out 5 J1-NN
ASCB Discrete Out 6 J1-PP
ASCB Discrete Out 7 J2-GG
ASCB Discrete Out 8 J2-NN
(2) CSDB Output Ports

Output Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
CSDB TX 1 J2-c (A)
J2-d (B)
CSDB TX 2 J2-a (A)
J2-b (B)
Page 328
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) ARINC Output Ports
Port Plug/Pin Default Configuration Notes
0A J2-A (A) ARINC 429 HS 2
J2-B (B)
0B J3-r (A) ARINC 429 HS 2
J3-s (B)
1 J2-C (A) ARINC 571 2
J2-D (B)
2A J3-w (A) ARINC 429 LS 2, 3
J3-x (B)
2B J3-y (A) ARINC 429 LS 2, 3
J3-z (B)
3 J3-AA (A) ARINC 429 LS 2
J3-BB (B)
4 J3-EE (A) ARINC 429 Tune LS 2
J3-FF (B)
4A J2-x (A) ARINC 429 LS 1
J2-y (B)
5 J2-z (A) ARINC 429 LS 1
J2-g (B)
6A J2-JJ (A) ARINC 429 LS 1
J2-KK (B)
6B J2-MM (A) ARINC 429 LS 1
J2-LL (B)
7 J2-DD (A) ARINC 429 LS 1
J2-p (B)
NOTES: 1. Available in Dual ARINC configuration FMSs, P/N 2017-XX-X2X or 10172-XX-
X2X only.
2. Available on all UNS-1C+ and UNS-1E configurations.
3. If the FMS contains an internal GPS, then the GPS is internally wired to
ARINC Transmitter Port 2. Port 2 must be configured for ARINC 429 LS. Any
external devices requiring 429 LS data must be connected to ARINC Transmit
Port 2A or 2B.
Page 329
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. ARINC Sensors Mutual Exclusion
Only one sensor of a particular type may be configured for an FMS. The following list shows
the sensors of similar type that are mutually exclusive in the configuration:
Valid Configurations
Sensor Type Mutually Exclusive
ADC 429 ADC, 575 ADC, IC600-L, P4-01 ONSD, P4-02 ONSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-
04 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD, P4-06 ONSD
ADC 429 ADC, 575 ADC, IC600-R, P4-01 ONSD, P4-02 ONSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-
04 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD, P4-06 ONSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600-L, P4-01 ONSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600-L, P4-01 OFFSD, P4-03 OFFSD, P4-05 OFFSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600-R, P4-01 ONSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600-R, P4-01 OFFSD, P4-03 OFFSD, P4-05 OFFSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600-L, P4-01 ONSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600-L, P4-01 OFFSD, P4-03 OFFSD, P4-05 OFFSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600-R, P4-01 ONSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600-R, P4-01 OFFSD, P4-03 OFFSD, P4-05 OFFSD
Attitude 1 429 IRGPS 1, LS429 IRS 1, HS429 IRS 1, 571 IRS 1, C-IV GPIRS 1
DME 1 429 DME, 709 DME, P4-DME1, RRS, RRS-T, TXC-670
DME 2 429 DME, 709 DME, P4-DME2, RRS, RRS-T, TXC-670
Doppler DOPPLER91, DOPPLER2012, DOPPLER 137
FGS KFC FGS, IC600-L
FGS KFC FGS, IC600-R
GPS 1 LS GPS 1 B1, LS GPS 1, HS GPS 1 B1, HS GPS 1
P4 IOC P4-01 ONSD, P4-02 ONSD, P4-03 OFFSD, P4-04 OFFSD, P4-05 OFFSD, P4-
06 OFFSD
P4 IOC P4-01 OFFSD, P4-02 OFFSD, P4-03 ONSD, P4-04 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD, P4-
06 ONSD
P4 IOC P4-03 ONSD, P4-04 ONSD, P4-05 OFFSD, P4-06 OFFSD
P4 IOC P4-03 OFFSD, P4-04 OFFSD, P4-05 ONSD, P4-06 ONSD
NOTES: If a Pro Line 4 IOC is configured on Input Port 6, the IC600-R bus is not available on PORT
5. If a Pro Line 4 IOC is configured on Input Port 5, the IC600-L bus is not available on
PORT 6.
For the Pro Line 4 800 Series configuration (standard LR60), any of the four combinations
of the P4-01 ONSD or P4-02 ONSD with P4-01 OFFSD or P4-02 OFFSD is allowed.
For the Pro Line 4 800 Series FIAS configuration, any of the four combinations of the P4-03
ONSD or P4-04 ONSD with P4-03 OFFSD or P4-04 OFFSD is allowed.
For the Pro Line 4 4000 Series configuration (F2000), any of the four combinations of the
P4-05 ONSD or P4-06 ONSD with P4-05 OFFSD or P4-06 OFFSD is allowed.
Page 330
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Valid Configurations
Sensor Type Mutually Exclusive
RADAR WPT 429 RADAR, 571 RADAR, RADAR 1500,P4-01 ONSD, P4-02 ONSD, P4-03
ONSD, P4-04 ONSD, IC600-L
RADAR WPT 429 RADAR, 571 RADAR, RADAR 1500,P4-01 ONSD, P4-02 ONSD, P4-03
ONSD, P4-04 ONSD, IC600-R
TACAN AN/ARN-118, RRS, P4-03 ONSD, P4-04 ONSD, TXC-670
NOTE: In the FIAS aircraft there is one TACAN and two MLS sensors installed. FMS 1 gathers
TACAN on its onside IOC bus, and FMS 2 gathers TACAN on its offside IOC bus. FMS 1
gathers MLS on its onside IOC bus, and FMS 2 gathers MLS 2 on its onside IOC bus.
VOR 429 VOR-R, 429 VOR-B, 711 VOR, RRS, RRS-T, P4-01 ONSD, P4-02 ONSD,
P4-03 ONSD, P4-04 ONSD, P4-05 ONSD, P4-06 ONSD
Page 331
34-60-22 1 May 2012
3. Pin Assignment
A. Digital Configuration UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-X0X and UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-X0X
(1) Connector J1
Pin Function Pin Function
A Fuel Flow 1 In (H) h ARINC RX Port 3 (B)
B Fuel Flow 1 In (L) i Ground (Power Return)
C Fuel Flow 2 In (H) j 28 VDC Aircraft Bus
D Fuel Flow 2 In (L) k 5 VDC/VAC Keypad Lighting (Note 1)
E Configuration Module Data I/O m 28 VDC Keypad Lighting (Note 1)
F Configuration Module Data Clock n Keypad Lighting Return
G Configuration Module Power p RS-422 (A) (Receive from External CDU)
H Configuration Module Power Return q RS-422 (B) (Receive from External CDU)
J r
K 26 VAC Heading Ref Input s
L 26 VAC Heading Ref Input Return t
M u CSDB RX 3 (A)
N v CSDB RX 3 (B)
P 26 VAC Autopilot Ref Output w CSDB RX 1 (A)
R 26 VAC Autopilot Ref Output Return x CSDB RX 1 (B)
S y CSDB RX 2 (A)
T RS-422 (A) (Transmit to External CDU) z CSDB RX 2 (B)
U RS-422 (B) (Transmit to External CDU) AA Discrete In 5 (GND/Open)
V Heading Valid Flag (28 V Discrete In) BB
W CC Discrete In 6 (GND/Open)
X Synchro In Heading X DD Discrete In 4 (GND/Open)
Y Synchro In Heading Y EE FMS2 Discrete In (GND = FMS #2)
Z Synchro In Heading Z FF FMS3 Discrete In (GND = FMS #3)
a ARINC RX 0 (A) GG Discrete In 7 (GND/Open)
ARINC TX (A) (GPS1) (Note 2) HH Heading Input (28 VDC = True, Open = Mag)
b ARINC RX 0 (B) JJ
ARINC TX (B) (GPS1) (Note 2) KK
c ARINC RX 1 (A) LL Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
d ARINC RX 1 (B) MM Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
e ARINC RX 2 (A) NN
f ARINC RX 2 (B) PP
g ARINC RX 3 (A)
NOTES: 1. Use either 5 VDC/VAC or 28 VDC power for keypad lighting, but not both.
2. Applies to Units equipped with GPS/GNSS.
Page 332
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) Connector J2
A ARINC TX 0A (A) i Fuel Flow 3 In (H)
B ARINC TX 0A (B) j Fuel Flow 3 In (L)
C ARINC TX 1 (A) k GPS1 Reserved (Note 1)
D ARINC TX 1 (B) m GPS1 Spare 1 (Note 1)
E RS-232 TX (Monitor Port) n GPS1 Spare 2 (Note 1)
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p
G RS-422 (A) q
H RS-422 (B) r
J RS-232 Chassis Ground s
K ARINC TX 1 (A) (GPS1) (Note 1) t
L ARINC TX 1 (B) (GPS1) (Note 1) u
M ARINC TX 2A (A) (GPS Output) (Note 1) v
N ARINC TX 2A (B) (GPS Output) (Note 1) w
P ARINC RX 2 (H) (GPS1) (Note 1) x
R ARINC RX 2 (L) (GPS1) (Note 1) y
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z
T Discrete Out 5 (GND/Open) AA Roll Steering Out (H)
U Annunciator Out Discrete (GND/Open) BB Roll Steering Out (L)
V Discrete Out 3 (GND/Open) CC Steering Valid Out (28 VDC = Valid)
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD
X EE Discrete Out 9 (28 VDC/Open)
Y Discrete Out 8 (GND/Open) FF Power Control (FMS Power On/Off)
Z GG
a CSDB TX 2 (A) HH
b CSDB TX 2 (B) JJ
c CSDB TX 1 (A) KK
d CSDB TX 1 (B) LL
e MM
f NN
g PP
h
NOTE: 1. GPS Applies to Units equipped with GPS/GNSS.
Page 333
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Connector J3
A Ethernet Receive (H) j
B k
C m Discrete Out 7 (GND/Open)
D n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
E p CSDB RX 4 (A)
F q CSDB RX 4 (B)
G r ARINC TX 0B (A)
H ARINC RX (A) (GPS1 Input 3) (Note 1) s ARINC TX 0B (B)
J ARINC RX (B) (GPS1 Input 3) (Note 1) t External Camera Video Synch Return
K GPS1 Time Mark Discrete Out (5 V Pulse) u External Camera Video Synch
(Note 1)
L v Ethernet Transmit (L)
M w ARINC TX 2A (A)
N x ARINC TX 2A (B)
P Discrete In 9 (GND/Open) y ARINC TX 2B (A) (Note 2)
R Discrete In 8 (GND/Open) z ARINC TX 2B (B) (Note 2)
S Discrete In 10 (28 VDC/Open) AA ARINC TX 3 (A)
T Discrete In 1 (GND/Open) BB ARINC TX 3 (B)
U External Camera Video Red CC Fuel Flow 4 In (H)
V External Camera Video Red Return DD Fuel Flow 4 In (L)
W External Camera Video Green EE ARINC RX 4 (A)
X External Camera Video Green Return FF ARINC RX 4 (B)
Y External Camera Video Blue GG ARINC RX 5 (A)
Z External Camera Video Blue Return HH ARINC RX 5 (B)
a Ethernet Transmit (H) JJ ARINC RX 6 (A)
b Ethernet Receive (L) KK ARINC RX 6 (B)
c LL ARINC RX 7 (A)
d MM ARINC RX 7 (B)
e NN
f PP
g Back Ethernet Shield
h Discrete In 11 (GND/Open) shell
i Discrete Out 1 (GND/Open)
NOTES: 1. GPS Applies to Units equipped with GPS/GNSS.
2. P3 y and z must be configured to LS with internal GPS.
Page 334
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. Analog Configuration UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-X1X and UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-X1X
(1) Connector J1
A Fuel Flow 1 In (H) h ARINC RX 3 (B)
J r
K 26 VAC Heading Reference Input s
L 26 VAC Heading Reference Input Return t
M 26 VAC Instrument Reference u CSDB RX 3 (A)
N 26 VAC Instrument Reference Return v CSDB RX 3 (B)
P 26 VAC Autopilot Reference Output w CSDB RX 1 (A)
R 26 VAC Autopilot Reference Output Return x CSDB RX 1 (B)
S y CSDB RX 2 (A)
b ARINC RX 0 (B) JJ
e ARINC RX 2 (A) NN
f ARINC RX 2 (B) PP
g ARINC RX 3 (A)
2. GPS Applies to Units equipped with GPS/GNSS.
Page 335
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) Connector J2
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p ARINC 561 Data (H)
G RS-422 (A) q ARINC 561 Data (L)
H RS-422 (B) r ARINC 561 Synch (H)
J RS-232 Chassis Ground s ARINC 561 Synch (L)
K ARINC TX 1 (A) (GPS1) (Note 1) t ARINC 561 Clock (H)
L ARINC TX 1 (B) (GPS1) (Note 1) u ARINC 561 Clock (L)
M ARINC TX 2A (A) (GPS Output) (Note 1) v ARINC 561 Data Valid
N ARINC TX 2A (B) (GPS Output) (Note 1) w
P ARINC RX 2 (H) (GPS1) (Note 1) x Synchro Bearing X
R ARINC RX 2 (L) (GPS1) (Note 1) y Synchro Bearing Y
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z Synchro Bearing Z
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD Navigation Valid (28 VDC = Valid)
Z GG Vertical Deviation (Analog DC)
a CSDB TX 2 (A) HH Vertical Deviation Return (Analog DC)
b CSDB TX 2 (B) JJ Vertical Deviation Valid Out (28 VDC = Valid)
c CSDB TX 1 (A) KK Lateral Deviation (Analog DC)
d CSDB TX 1 (B) LL Lateral Deviation Return (Analog DC)
e Synchro In Desired Track X MM To/From (Analog DC)
f Synchro In Desired Track Y NN To/From Return (Analog DC)
g Synchro In Desired Track Z PP
h
Page 336
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Connector J3
A Ethernet Receive (H) i Discrete Out 1 (GND/Open)
B j
C k
D m Discrete Out 7 (GND/Open)
E Analog AC Pitch Command n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
F Analog AC Pitch Command Return p CSDB RX 4 (A)
G Pitch Valid (28 VDC = Valid) q CSDB RX 4 (B)
H ARINC RX (A) (GPS1 Input 3) (Note 1) r ARINC TX 0B (A)
J ARINC RX (B) (GPS1 Input 3) (Note 1) s ARINC TX 0B (B)
K GPS1 Time Mark Discrete Out (5 V Pulse) t External Camera Video Synch Return
(Note 1)
L u External Camera Video Synch
M v Ethernet Transmit (L)
N w ARINC TX 2A (A)
P Discrete In 9 (GND/Open) x ARINC TX 2A (B)
R Discrete In 8 (GND/Open) y ARINC TX 2B (A) (Note 2)
S Discrete In 10 (28 VDC/Open) z ARINC TX 2B (B) (Note 2)
T Discrete In 1 (GND/Open) AA ARINC TX 3 (A)
U External Camera Video Red BB ARINC TX 3 (B)
V External Camera Video Red Return CC Fuel Flow 4 In (H)
W External Camera Video Green DD Fuel Flow 4 In (L)
X External Camera Video Green Return EE ARINC RX 4 (A)
Y External Camera Video Blue FF ARINC RX 4 (B)
Z External Camera Video Blue Return GG ARINC RX 5 (A)
a Ethernet Transmit (H) HH ARINC RX 5 (B)
b Ethernet Receive (L) JJ ARINC RX 6 (A)
c KK ARINC RX 6 (B)
d LL ARINC RX 7 (A)
e MM ARINC RX 7 (B)
f NN Reserved DTU+
g PP Reserved DTU-
h Discrete In 11 (GND/Open) Back Ethernet Shield
shell
2. P3 y and z must be configured to LS with internal GPS/GNSS.
Page 337
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Dual ARINC Configuration UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-X2X and UNS-1E
P/N 2017-XX-X2X
(1) Connector J1
J r
K 26 VAC Heading Ref Input s ARINC RX 10 (B)
M ARINC RX 8 (B) u CSDB RX 3 (A)
N ARINC RX 8 (A) v CSDB RX 3 (B)
S y CSDB RX 2 (A)
W ARINC RX 10 (A) CC Discrete In 6 (GND/Open)
b ARINC RX 0 (B) JJ
e ARINC RX 2 (A) NN ARINC RX 12 (A)
f ARINC RX 2 (B) PP ARINC RX 12 (B)
g ARINC RX 3 (A)
Page 338
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) Connector J2
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p ARINC TX 7 (B)
G RS-422 (A) q
H RS-422 (B) r ARINC RX 11 (B)
K ARINC TX 1 (A) (GPS1) (Note 1) t ARINC RX 11 (A)
M ARINC TX 2A (A) (GPS Output) (Note 1) v ARINC RX 14 (A)
N ARINC TX 2A (B) (GPS Output) (Note 1) w ARINC RX 9 (A)
P ARINC RX 2 (H) (GPS1) (Note 1) x ARINC TX 4A (A)
R ARINC RX 2 (L) (GPS1) (Note 1) y ARINC TX 4A (B)
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z ARINC TX 5 (A)
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD ARINC TX 7 (A)
Z GG ARINC RX 13 (A)
a CSDB TX 2 (A) HH ARINC RX 14 (B)
b CSDB TX 2 (B) JJ ARINC TX 6A (A)
c CSDB TX 1 (A) KK ARINC TX 6A (B)
d CSDB TX 1 (B) LL ARINC TX 6B (B)
e ARINC TX 4B (A) MM ARINC TX 6B (A)
f ARINC TX 4B (B) NN ARINC RX 13 (B)
g ARINC TX 5 (B) PP ARINC RX 9 (B)
h
Page 339
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Connector J3
B j
C k
E ARINC RX 15 (A) n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
F ARINC RX 15 (B) p CSDB RX 4 (A)
G q CSDB RX 4 (B)
(Note 1)
N w ARINC TX 2A (A)
c KK ARINC RX 6 (B)
d LL ARINC RX 7 (A)
e MM ARINC RX 7 (B)
f NN Reserved
g PP Reserved
shell
Page 340
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. ASCB Configuration UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-X3X and UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-X3X
(1) Connector J1
J r
K 26 VAC Heading Ref Input s
M ASCB Discrete In 2 (GND/Open) u CSDB RX 3 (A)
N ASCB Discrete In 1 (GND/Open) v CSDB RX 3 (B)
S y CSDB RX 2 (A)
b ARINC RX 0 (B) JJ
e ARINC RX 2 (A) NN ASCB Discrete Out 5 (GND/Open)
f ARINC RX 2 (B) PP ASCB Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
g ARINC RX 3 (A)
Page 341
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) Connector J2
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p
G RS-422 (A) q
H RS-422 (B) r ASCB Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open)
K ARINC TX 1 (A) (GPS1) (Note 1) t ASCB Discrete Out 1 (GND/Open)
M ARINC TX 2A (A) (GPS Output) (Note 1) v ASCB B Data +
N ARINC TX 2A (B) (GPS Output) (Note 1) w ASCB Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
P ARINC RX 2 (H) (GPS1) (Note 1) x ASCB A Data +
R ARINC RX 2 (L) (GPS1) (Note 1) y ASCB A Data -
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z ASCB A Clock +
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD
Z GG ASCB Discrete Out 7 (28 VDC/Open)
a CSDB TX 2 (A) HH ASCB B Data -
b CSDB TX 2 (B) JJ ASCB Discrete Out 3 (GND/Open)
c CSDB TX 1 (A) KK ASCB Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open)
d CSDB TX 1 (B) LL ASCB Discrete In 8 (GND/Open)
e ASCB Discrete In 5 (GND/Open) MM ASCB Discrete In 7 (GND/Open)
f ASCB Discrete In 6 (GND/Open) NN ASCB Discrete Out 8 (28 VDC/Open)
g ASCB A Clock - PP ASCB Discrete In 4 (GND/Open)
h
Page 342
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Connector J3
B j
C k
E ASCB B Clock + n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
F ASCB B Clock - p CSDB RX 4 (A)
G q CSDB RX 4 (B)
(Note 1)
N w ARINC TX 2A (A)
c KK ARINC RX 6 (B)
d LL ARINC RX 7 (A)
e MM ARINC RX 7 (B)
f NN Reserved DTU+
g PP Reserved DTU+
shell
Page 343
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. 5-Inch FPCDU Pin Assignment P/N 1018-X-XXX
J1 Connector
Pin Description
A Red
B Red Return
C Green
D Green Return
E Blue
F Blue return
G Sync
H Sync Return
J2 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU RX Data (A)
B CDU RX Data (B)
C CDU RX Data Shield
D
E +28 VDC Keypad Lighting
F Ground Keypad Lighting
G +5 VDC or 5 VAC Keypad Lighting
CAUTION: Use 5 V or 28 V power for keypad lighting but not both.
H
J CDU TX Data (A)
K CDU TX Data (B)
L CDU TX Data Shield
M +28 VDC Power Input
N
P Power +28 VDC Return
R Power On Control Output
J3 Connector
Pin Description
A
B RS-422 Display Data TX (H)
C RS-422 Display Data TX (L)
D Ground
E RS-422 Display Data RX (H)
F RS-422 Display Data RX (L)
G Remote (Repeater) CDU when grounded
H Ground
Page 344
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. 4-Inch FPCDU Pin Assignment
(1) P/N 1117-XX and 1117-1-X0X (No Video or Graphics Capability)
J1 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU RX Data (A)
B CDU RX Data (B)
D #2 CDU Strap
H
J CDU TX Data (A)
K CDU TX Data (B)
N Ground
Page 345
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) 1117-2-X1X (With Video and Graphics Capability)
J1 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU RX Data (A)
B CDU RX Data (B)
D #2 CDU Strap
H
J CDU TX Data (A)
K CDU TX Data (B)
N Ground
J2 Connector
Pin Description
A Red Input
B Red Return
C Green Input
D Green Return
E Blue Input
F Blue Return
G Sync Input
H Sync Return
J3 Connector
Pin Description
A
B RS-422 Display Data TX (H)
C RS-422 Display Data TX (L)
D Ground
E RS-422 Display Data RX (H)
F RS-422 Display Data RX (L)
G Remote (Repeater) CDU when grounded
H Ground
Page 346
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. DTU-100 - Pin Assignment
(1) Connector - J1
A RS-422 (A) J Option Pin 1
B RS-422 (B) K Option Pin 2 (Not Used)
C Ethernet #0 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #0 RX (-) M Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #0 Shield N Aux Port RS-232 RX
F Ethernet #0 TX (+) P Power Return
G Ethernet #0 TX (-) R Aux Port RS-232 TX
H Option Pin 0
(2) Connector - J2
A Ethernet #1 RX (+) J Ethernet #3 RX (+)
B Ethernet #1 RX (-) K Ethernet #3 RX (-)
C Ethernet #1 TX (+) L Ethernet #3 TX (+)
D Ethernet #1 TX (-) M Not Used
E Ethernet #2 RX (+) N Ethernet #3 TX (-)
F Ethernet #2 RX (-) P Ethernet Shield
G Ethernet #2 TX (+) R Not Used
H Ethernet #2 TX (-)
Page 347
34-60-22 1 May 2012
H. SSDTU - Pin Assignment
(1) Connector - J1
A EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) J
B EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) K
C Ethernet #1 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #1 RX (-) M SSDTU Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #1 Shield N EIA-232 RX
F Ethernet #1 TX (+) P SSDTU Ground
G Ethernet #1 TX (-) R EIA-232 TX
H
(2) Connector - J2
1 Ethernet #3 RX (+) 29 Ethernet #8 Shield
2 Ethernet #3 TX (+) 30 Ethernet #5 Shield
3 31 Ethernet #5 TX (+)
4 Ethernet #2 RX (-) 32
5 33
7 Ethernet #3 TX (-) 35 Ethernet #8 TX (+)
8 Ethernet #4 TX (-) 36 Ethernet #8 RX (+)
9 Ethernet #4 TX (+) 37
10 Ethernet #2 TX (-) 38 Ethernet #5 RX (+)
11 Ethernet #2 RX (+) 39 Ethernet #5 TX (-)
12 40 Ethernet #7 RX (+)
13 Ethernet #3 Shield 41 Ethernet #7 RX (-)
14 42 Ethernet #7 Shield
16 Ethernet #4 RX (+) 44 Ethernet #6 Shield
17 45
18 Ethernet #2 TX (+) 46 Ethernet #5 RX (-)
19 Ethernet #2 Shield 47 Ethernet #7 TX (+)
20 48 Ethernet #7 TX (-)
21 49
22 50 Ethernet #6 TX (+)
23 Ethernet #4 Shield 51 Ethernet #6 RX (+)
24 52
25 53
26 54 Ethernet #6 TX (-)
27 Ethernet #8 TX (-) 55 Ethernet #6 RX (-)
28 Ethernet #8 RX (-)
Page 348
34-60-22 1 May 2012
4. UNS-1E & UNS-1C+ Wiring
The following wiring diagrams represent the basic FMS wiring, including ARINC, discrete,
CSDB, analog and other inputs and outputs. The diagrams also include ancillary equipment
such as the FPCDU and Data Transfer Unit. For all other interfaces such as radar and radios,
refer to FMS Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-27.
Wiring diagrams apply to all versions of the UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ unless otherwise noted
on the wiring diagram. Reference to the Pin Identification Charts found later in this section
will be helpful in understanding the differences between FMS versions. There is also an FMS
Part Number Matrix in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual, which will
further aid in understanding FMS differences.
The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a
reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein
do not represent any specific STC or Form 337 aircraft installation. It is the installer’s
responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the
drawings contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC or Form 337 drawing
package.
Page 349
34-60-22 1 May 2012
A. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ All Configurations
The following wiring diagrams apply to UNS-1C+, P/N 10172-XX-XXX and UNS-1E, P/N
2017-XX-XXX.
(1) Power and Configuration Module - All Configurations
UNS-1C+ 10172-XX-XXX
UNS-1E 2017-XX-XXX
P1
5VDC OR 5VAC 4
H k 20
PANEL LIGHTING
KEYPAD m 20 28 V PANEL LIGHTING
4 H 4
LIGHTING
L n 20
28 VDC IN j 20 5 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BUS
DC RETURN i 20
GND H 24 AWG BROWN

CONFIGURATION
+5 VDC G 24 AWG RED MODULE
CONFIG P/N 10171
MODULE DATA CLK F 24 AWG YELLOW
3
DATA I/O E 24 AWG BLUE
P2
ANN DISC #5 OUT
HDG T 5
(GND/OPEN)
ANNUNCIATOR
MSG U
OUTPUT
REMOTE FMS
ANN DISC #2 OUT 5 ANNUNCIATORS
(GND/OPEN) WPT W
IF INSTALLED
ANN DISC #3 OUT (GND = ON)
SXTK V 5
(GND/OPEN)
ANN DISC #4 OUT 5
APRCH S
(GND/OPEN)
SENSOR POWER ON FF TO SENSOR POWER CONTROL

CONTROL OUTPUT INPUTS OF UNS SENSORS (20 mA MAX)
DISCRETE 8 OUT Y 6
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 OUT EE
7
(28VDC/OPEN)
(FMS VALID)
P3
DISCRETE 1 OUT i 6
(GND/OPEN)
REMOTE FMS
ANN DISC #6 OUT n 6 ANNUNCIATOR
INTEG
(GND/OPEN) IF INSTALLED
(GND = ON)
DISCRETE 7 OUT m 6
(GND/OPEN)
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 A.W.G. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 THE CONFIGURATION MODULE IS PROGRAMMED THROUGH THE NCU AND IS MOUNTED ON, AND BECOMES PART
OF, THE CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF. WIRES SHOWN ARE PART OF THE CONFIGURATION MODULE.
4 USE EITHER 5 V OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETES ARE CONFIGURABLE ON P2 PINS S, T, V & W. DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SHOWN.
6 DISCRETES ARE CONFIGURABLE WITH NO DEFAULT. REFER TO THE WAAS FMS CONFIGURATION MANUAL.
7 35 ma LOAD MAX.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL
AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 350
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) 4-Inch FPCDU P/N 1117-XX or 1117-1-X0X (No video or graphic capability)
4-INCH FPCDU
P/N 1117-XX or
UNS-1E OR UNS-1C+ P/N 1117-X-XXX
J1 J1
A T A A
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX
RS422
B U B B
2 2 C
A p J A
CDU DATA RX
CDU DATA TX
RS422
B q K B
L
J2
FMS POWER CONTROL IN FF R POWER ON CONTROL OUT
AIRCRAFT +28 VDC POWER 20 M 28V POWER INPUT

2
20 P POWER RETURN
28 VDC 20 E H
3
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING 3
5 VDC
3 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2 DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 USE EITHER 5 VDC OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 351
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) 4-Inch FPCDU P/N 1117-2-X1X (Video and graphics capable)
4-INCH FPCDU
UNS-1E OR UNS-1C+ P/N 1117-2-X1X
J1 P1
UNILINK
P/N 106X-XX-XXX
A T A A
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX P3
RS422
B U B B
RS422 H E
DISPLAY RS-422 TX
2 2 C
DATA TX L F
A p J A
CDU DATA RX 4
CDU DATA TX
RS422
B q K B H B
RS422
DISPLAY RS-422 RX
L C
J2 DATA RX L
R POWER ON D
FMS POWER CONTROL IN FF
CONTROL OUT
AIRCRAFT +28 VDC POWER 20 M 28V POWER INPUT

2
20 P POWER RETURN
28 VDC 20 E H
3
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING 3
5 VDC
3 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
P2
A RED
B RED RETURN
C GREEN
D GREEN RETURN
VIDEO VIDEO
E BLUE
5
F BLUE RETURN
G SYNC
H SYNC RETURN
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
4 REFER TO APPROPRIATE UNILINK INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
5 REFER TO APPROPRIATE VIDEO DEVICE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 352
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(4) 5-Inch Flat Panel CDU
UNS-1E 2017-XX-XXX 5" FPCDU
P/N 1018-X-XXX
P1 P2
CDU DATA A T A
OUTPUT FMS DATA RCV
RS422 B U B
C
CDU DATA A p J
INPUT FMS DATA XMIT
RS422 B q K
L
P2
FMS POWER CONTROL IN FF R
1
AC +28 VDC POWER 2A 20 M
20 P
2
28 VDC 20 E H
FPCDU
2 PNL F L
LTG 20
LIGHTING
G H
5VDC OR 20
5VAC
P1
A RED
B RED RETURN
C GREEN
3 D GREEN RETURN
VIDEO VIDEO
E BLUE
3
F BLUE RETURN
G SYNC
H SYNC RETURN
1 USE TRANSORB FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION.

(TRANSORB P/N = 1N6284)
3 VIDEO IS APPLICABLE ONLY TO 5" FPCDU P/N 1018-2-XXX.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN

NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 353
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) Discrete Inputs - All Configurations
UNS-1E 2017-XX-XXX
P1
561 DTG DISCRETE 2 IN OPEN = 0 - 3999 NM

MM 1
RES (OPEN/GND) GND = 0 - 399 NM
DISCRETE 3 IN
LL 1
(OPEN/GND)
DISCRETE 4 IN
TEST DD 1
(OPEN/GND)
DISCRETE 5 IN OPEN = MAGNETIC

MAG/TRU AA 1
(OPEN/GND) GND = TRUE
OUT SEL
GND
DISCRETE 6 IN GND W/ AC ON GND
STRUT SW
CC 1
DISCRETE (OPEN/GND)
FREQ AIR
DISCRETE 7 IN
GG 1
MGMT (OPEN/GND)
P3
SPERRY DISCRETE 1 IN
VNAV T 1
(OPEN/GND)
CAPT
DISCRETE 8 IN
R 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 IN
P 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 10 IN S 1
(28 VDC/OPEN)
DISCRETE 11 IN h 1
(GND/OPEN)
1 CONFIGURABLE INPUT DISCRETE. DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SHOWN WHERE APPLICABLE. REFER TO THE
CONFIGURATION MANUAL 34-60-26.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL
Page 354
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(6) DTU-100 - All Configurations
DTU-100
(P/N 1406-01-X)
P1
H OPTION PIN 0
1
J OPTION PIN 1
20 L CHASSIS GROUND
C +
ETHERNET
RX CH0
D -
3 F +
ETHERNET
TX CH0
G -
E SHIELD
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC 20 M 28 VDC IN
FMS #1 AIRCRAFT BUS 1
UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-XXX
UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-XXX
P3 P2
3
+ a A +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v B -
+ A C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b D -
ETHERNET SHIELD E +
2 ETHERNET
RX CH2
F -
CONNECT TO
FMS #2
IF INSTALLED G +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
H -
J +
ETHERNET
RX CH3
K -
CONNECT TO
FMS #3
IF INSTALLED L +
ETHERNET
TX CH3
N -
P SHIELD
NOTES:
1 INTERFACE PIN 0 (H) PIN 1 (J)

RS422 ONLY OPEN OPEN
ETHERNET ONLY OPEN GND
RS422 OPEN OPEN
RS422 & ETHERNET GND GND
2 CONNECT ETHERNET SHIELD TO BACKSHELL OF P3.
3 ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE) P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 355
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(7) Portable DTU-100 - All Configurations
PORTABLE DTU-100
1 (P/N 1407-01-1)
P1
9 9 C +
ETHERNET
RX CH0
8 8 D -
6 6 F +
ETHERNET
TX CH0
7 7 G -
5 5 E SHIELD
20 12 12 P DC RETURN
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
FMS #1
P3 1 P2
3
+ a A A A +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v B B B -
+ A C C C +
ETHERNET
ETHERNET TX CH1
RX D D D -
- b
ETHERNET SHIELD 2 E E E +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
F F F -
CONNECT TO
FMS #2 G G G +
IF INSTALLED ETHERNET
TX CH2
H H H -
J J J +
ETHERNET
RX CH3
K K K -
CONNECT TO
FMS #3 L L L +
IF INSTALLED ETHERNET
TX CH3
N N N -
P P P ETHERNET SHIELD
NOTES:
1 THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE DTU.
3 USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
Page 356
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(8) SSDTU Installation and DTU-100 Replacement - All Configurations
SSDTU
(P/N 1408-00-X)
6 P1
A EIA-485 SIDE A
FMS #1
UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-XXX B EIA-485 SIDE B
P3 L CHASSIS GROUND
20
1 2
+ a C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v D -
+ A F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b G -
E SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD 3
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
1 2 5
11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
P2 4 -
1 2 5
51 + 18 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH6 TX CH2
55 - 10 -
50 19 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH6 1 +
54 - ETHERNET
RX CH3
6 -
44 SHIELD
40 + 2 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH7 TX CH3
41 - 7 -
47 13 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH7 16 +
48 - ETHERNET
RX CH4
15 -
42 SHIELD
36 + 9 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH8 TX CH4
28 - 8 -
35 23 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH8 38 +
27 - ETHERNET
RX CH5
46 -
29 SHIELD
31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 -
30 SHIELD
NOTES:
2 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN
0.5 INCHES LONG.
REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU:
4. ETHERNET PORTS ON THE DTU-100 ARE NUMBERED ZERO(0) THRU THREE (3). PORTS ON THE SSDTU ARE NUMBERED ONE (1) THRU EIGHT (8).
5 TO HAVE ETHERNET PORTS TWO (2) THRU EIGHT (8) AVAILABLE WHEN REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU, ADDITIONAL
WIRING MUST BE ADDED FOR PORTS FOUR (4) THRU EIGHT(8) AND THE DTU-100 P2 CONNECTOR MUST BE REPLACED WITH
CONNECTOR PART NUMBER 83000255 WHICH IS INCLUDED IN INSTALLATION KIT K12079-1.
6 WHEN REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU, NO CHANGES ARE REQUIRED TO THE PLUG P1 OR WIRING.
Page 357
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(9) Portable SSDTU - All Configurations
FMS #1
UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-XXX PORTABLE SSDTU
UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-XXX J1 BULKHEAD HARNESS (P/N 1409-00-2)
P3 CONNECTOR P/N 81304072 P1
3 4
+ a 9 9 C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v 8 8 D -
+ A 6 6 F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b 7 7 G -
ETHERNET SHIELD 2 5 5 E SHIELD
1 1 A A
EIA-485 DATA
2 2 B B
12 12 P DC RETURN
20 11 11 L CHASSIS GROUND
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR P/N 81140821 P2
11 11 11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
3 4 4 4 -
J2 BULKHEAD
3 4 CONNECTOR P2
18 18 18 +
4 ETHERNET
TX CH2
51 51 51 + 10 10 10 -
ETHERNET
RX CH6
55 55 55 - 19 19 19 SHIELD #2
50 50 50 + ETHERNET 1 1 1 +
ETHERNET
TX CH6 RX CH3
54 54 54 - 6 6 6 -
44 44 44 SHIELD #6 2 2 2 +
ETHERNET
TX CH3
40 40 40 + 7 7 7 -
ETHERNET
RX CH7
41 41 41 - 13 13 13 SHIELD #3
47 47 47 + 16 16 16 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH7 RX CH4
48 48 48 - 15 15 15 -
42 42 42 SHIELD #7 9 9 9 +
ETHERNET
TX CH4
36 36 36 + 8 8 8 -
ETHERNET
RX CH8
28 28 28 - 23 23 23 SHIELD #4
35 35 35 + 38 38 38 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH8 RX CH5
27 27 27 - 46 46 46 -
29 29 29 SHIELD #8 31 31 31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 39 39 -
30 30 30 SHIELD #5
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE DTU.
4 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
Page 358
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(10) Portable SSDTU (Portable DTU-100 Retrofit) - All Configurations
FMS #1
UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-XXX PORTABLE SSDTU
UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-XXX J1 BULKHEAD HARNESS
P3 4 P/N 81304072 P1 (P/N 1409-00-2)
CONNECTOR
2 3
+ a 9 9 C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v 8 8 D -
+ A 6 6 F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b 7 7 G -
ETHERNET SHIELD 5 5 5 E SHIELD
1 1 A A
EIA-485 DATA
2 2 B B
12 12 P DC RETURN
20 11 11 L CHASSIS GROUND
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR 4 P/N 81140811 P2
A A 11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
B B 4 -
C C 18 +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
D D 10 -
19 SHIELD #2
E E 1 +
ETHERNET
RX CH3
F F 6 -
G G 2 +
ETHERNET
TX CH3
H H 7 -
13 SHIELD #3
J J 16 +
ETHERNET
RX CH4
K K 15 -
L L 9 +
ETHERNET
TX CH4
N N 8 -
P P 23 SHIELD #4
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE SSDTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE SSDTU.
3 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
THE PORTABLE SSDTU MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF THE PORTABLE DTU BY USING WIRING HARNESS P/N 81304072 TO
4 CONNECT J1 AND P/N 81140811 TO CONNECT J2 OF THE SSDTU TO BULKHEAD CONNECTORS USED FOR THE PORTABLE
DTU. USING THE SSDTU IN THIS CONFIGURATION LIMITS THE ETHERNET PORTS TO #1-4, PORTS #5-7 ARE NOT AVAILABLE
IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
Page 359
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(11) Video Wiring Diagram - All Configurations
P1
#2 FMS SELECT EE GND IF APPLICABLE

2
#3 FMS SELECT FF GND IF APPLICABLE
P3
RED U
RED RTN V
GREEN W
EXTERNAL GREEN RTN X

VIDEO 1
INPUT BLUE Y
BLUE RTN Z
SYNC u
SYNC RTN t
GPS ANTENNA 3
NOTES:
1 EXTERNAL RGB VIDEO INPUT ALLOWS THE FMS TO BE USED AS A VIDEO DISPLAY FOR CAMERAS ETC.. THE RGB
INPUTS ARE 75 OHM TERMINATED. THEY ACCEPT THE RS-170 STANDARD ONE VOLT SIGNAL. THE SYNC INPUT CAN
BE DRIVEN BY COMPOSITE SYNC, 0 TO 5V NEGATIVE LOGIC SIGNAL.
2 FMS SELECT P1-EE P1-FF

FMS #1 OPEN OPEN
FMS #2 GND OPEN
FMS #3 (SIDE 1) OPEN GND
3 REFER TO EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION AND COAX RECOMMENDATIONS. WHEN
CALCULATING COAX LENGTH, THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOSS IS 18dB.
Page 360
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ All Digital Configuration
The following wiring diagrams apply to UNS-1C+, P/N 10172-XX-X0X and UNS-1E, P/N
2017-XX-X0X.
(1) Wiring Diagram 1 of 3 - All Digital Configuration
UNS-1C+ P/N 10172-XX-X3X
UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-X3X
P1
#1 COMPASS SYSTEM
X X
SYNCHRO
HEADING Y Y
INPUT
Z Z
+28 HDG VALID V

INPUT
SYNCHRO HDG FLAG HH
INPUT SELECT
TRUE = 28VDC
MAG = OPEN
H K 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS
HEADING
REF L L
H P 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

26 VAC
A/P REF
L R
P2 FD/AP COMPUTER
ROLL STRG VALID CC
H AA 1
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT
L BB
P1
H A
#1
L B
H C
#2
L D
FUEL AIRCRAFT FUEL FLOW SYSTEM
FLOW P2 1) DC ANALOG
INPUTS 2) AC ANALOG
H i 3) PULSE WIDTH AND FREQUENCY
#3
L j
P3
H CC
#4
L DD
1 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT, ON LEARJET 30 SERIES AIRCRAFT, WITH JET FC200

AUTOPILOT, A STEERING INTERFACE UNIT (SIU), P/N 92-7001-1, BE INSTALLED.
THIS ALLOWS FULL FMS ROLL STEERING CAPABILITIES TO BE USED BY THE AUTOPILOT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT

MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 361
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P2
A a
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #2
B b
A c
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #1 B d
P1
A u
CSDB INPUT
PORT #3
B v
A w CSDB DME/VOR
CSDB INPUT
PORT #1 1
B x
A y
CSDB INPUT
PORT #2 B z
P3
A p
CSDB INPUT
PORT #4
B q
P2
A A
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0A 3
B B
2
A C
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #1
B D
2
P3
1) POSITION
A w 2) RADAR
ARINC 429/571 3) ARINC DME/VOR
OUPUT PORT #2A 4 5
B x 4) DADC
5) AHRS
6) XFILL, IF CROSSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED
A y 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #2B 4 5 8) TAWS
B z
A AA
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #3
B BB
A r
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0B 3
B s
1 RS-422-NRZ DATA FORMAT FOR ALL CSDB LISTINGS.

2 ARINC OUTPUT PORTS #0A AND #1 CANNOT BE CONFIGURED THE SAME (THAT IS, IF #0A IS
CONFIGURED FOR 429LS, THEN #1 CANNOT ALSO BE CONFIGURED FOR 429LS).
3 PORTS 0A AND 0B ALWAYS OUTPUT THE SAME DATA.
5 IF AN INTERNAL GPS IS INSTALLED, OUTPUT PORTS 2A & 2B MUST BE CONFIGURED AS

429 LS.
Page 362
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P1
ARINC 429/571 A a
INPUT PORT #0 1
B b
A c 1) POSITION
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #1 2) RADAR
B d 3) ARINC DME/VOR
4) DADC
5) AHRS
A e 6) XFILL, IF CROSSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #2 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
B f 8) TAWS
A g
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #3 B h
P3
A EE
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #4
B FF
A GG
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #5
B HH
A JJ
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #6 B KK
A LL
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #7
B MM
1 IF AN INTERNAL GPS IS INSTALLED, INPUT PORT 0 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS

GPSnB1 WHERE n IS THE SAME AS FMS #1, FMS #2, OR FMS #3.
Page 363
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ Standard AC Pitch (Analog) Configuration
2017-XX-X1X.
(1) Wiring Diagram 1 of 4 - Standard AC Pitch Configuration
P1
#1 COMPASS SYSTEM
X X
SYNCHRO
HEADING Y Y
INPUT
Z Z
+28 HDG VALID V

INPUT
SYNCHRO HDG FLAG HH
INPUT SELECT
TRUE = 28VDC
MAG = OPEN
H M 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS
26 VAC
INSTR REF L N
H K
HEADING
REF L L

26 VAC
A/P REF
L R
P3
PITCH CMD H E
OUTPUT
L F VNAV
PITCH OUT VALID G

28 VDC
P2 FD/AP COMPUTER
ROLL STRG VALID CC
H AA 1
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT
L BB
P1
H A
#1
L B
H C
#2
L D
FLOW P2 1) DC ANALOG
INPUTS 2) AC ANALOG
H i 3) PULSE WIDTH AND FREQUENCY
#3
L j
P3
H CC
#4
L DD


Page 364
34-60-22 1 May 2012

P2
FD SWITCH UNIT FD SWITCH UNIT
LATERAL DEV. R KK (AS APPLICABLE)
(XTK)
L LL
MASTER NAV VALID DD
UP GG
DN HH
HI LVL VERT VALID JJ

28 VDC
FMS PWR VHF NAV
FD NAV
SELECT
FMS NAV
X-SIN x
SYNCHRO OR Y-COS y
RESOLVER
BEARING
Z-SIN/ z
COS RET
X-SIN e
SYNCHRO OR Y-COS f
RESOLVER
DES TRK
Z-SIN/ g
COS RET
DATA H p
OUT
L q
H r
ARINC 561 SYNC
OUTPUT
L s
H t
CLK
L u
ARINC 561 v
DIGITAL VALID
TO MM
FROM NN

NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 365
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P2
A a
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #2
B b
CSDB OUTPUT
A c
PORT #1
B d
P1
A u
CSDB INPUT
PORT #3 B v
A w CSDB DME/VOR
CSDB INPUT
PORT #1 1
B x
A y
CSDB INPUT
PORT #2 B z
P3
A p
CSDB INPUT
PORT #4 B q
P2
A A
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0A 3
B B
2
A C
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #1 B D
2
P3
1) POSITION
A w 2) RADAR
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #2A 4 5 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B x 4) DADC
5) AHRS
A y 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #2B 4 5 8) TAWS
B z
A AA
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #3
B BB
A r
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0B 3
B s


429 LS.
Page 366
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P1
A a
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #0 1
B b
A c 1) POSITION
ARINC 429/571 2) RADAR
INPUT PORT #1 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B d
4) DADC
5) AHRS
ARINC 429/571 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
INPUT PORT #2 8) TAWS
B f
A g
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #3 B h
P3
A EE
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #4
B FF
A GG
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #5
B HH
A JJ
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #6 B KK
A LL
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #7
B MM
1 IF AN INTERNAL GPS IS INSTALLED, PORT 0 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS GPSnB1

WHERE n IS THE SAME AS FMS #1, FMS #2, OR FMS #3.

Page 367
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ Dual ARINC Configuration
2017-XX-X2X.
(1) Wiring Diagram 1 of 4 - Dual ARINC Configuration
P1
#1 COMPASS SYSTEM
X X
SYNCHRO
HEADING Y Y
INPUT
Z Z
+28 HDG VALID V

INPUT
SYNCHRO HDG FLAG HH
INPUT SELECT
TRUE = 28VDC
MAG = OPEN
HEADING
REF L L

26 VAC
A/P REF
L R
P2 FD/AP COMPUTER
ROLL STRG VALID CC
H AA 1
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT
L BB
P1
H A
#1
L B
H C
#2
L D
FLOW 1) DC ANALOG
P2 2) AC ANALOG
INPUTS
3) PULSE WIDTH AND FREQUENCY
H i
#3
L j
P3
H CC
#4
L DD


Page 368
34-60-22 1 May 2012

P2
A a
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #2
B b
A c
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #1 B d
P1
A u
CSDB INPUT
PORT #3 B v
A w CSDB DME/VOR
CSDB INPUT
PORT #1 1
B x
A y
CSDB INPUT
PORT #2 B z
P3
A p
CSDB INPUT
PORT #4
B q
P2
A A
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0A 3
B B
2
A C
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #1
B D
2
P3
1) POSITION
A w 2) RADAR
OUPUT PORT #2A 4 5
B x 4) DADC
5) AHRS
A y 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
ARINC 429/571 8) TAWS
OUPUT PORT #2B 4 5
B z
A AA
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #3 B BB
A r
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0B 3
B s


429 LS.
Page 369
34-60-22 1 May 2012

P2
A x
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #4A
B y
A e
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #4B
B f
A z
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #5
B g
A JJ
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #6A B KK
A MM
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #6B B 1) POSITION
LL
2) RADAR
3) ARINC DME/VOR
4) DADC
A DD
ARINC 429/571 5) AHRS
OUPUT PORT #7 6) XFILL, IF CROSSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED
B p 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
8) TAWS
P1
A a
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #0 1
B b
A c
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #1
B d
A e
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #2
B f
A g
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #3 B h
P3
A EE
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #4 B FF
A GG
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #5 B HH
A JJ
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #6
B KK
A LL
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #7 B MM


Page 370
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P1
A N
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #8 B M
P2
A w
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #9 B PP
P1
A W
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #10 B s
P2
A t
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #11 B r
P1
A NN
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #12 B PP
P2
A GG
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #13 B NN
ARINC 429/571 A v
INPUT PORT #14 HH
B
P3
A E
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #15 B F

NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL
Page 371
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. UNS-1E and UNS-1C+ ASCB Configuration
2017-XX-X3X.
(1) Wiring Diagram 1 of 4 - ASCB Configuration

P1
#1 COMPASS SYSTEM
X X
SYNCHRO
HEADING Y Y
INPUT
Z Z
+28 HDG VALID V

INPUT
SYNCHRO HDG FLAG HH
INPUT SELECT
TRUE = 28VDC
MAG = OPEN
HEADING
REF L L

26 VAC
A/P REF
L R
P2 FD/AP COMPUTER
ROLL STRG VALID CC
H AA 1
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT
L BB
P1
H A
#1 #1 FUEL FLOW
L B
H C
#2 #2 FUEL FLOW
L D
FUEL
FLOW P2
INPUTS
H i
#3 #3 FUEL FLOW
L j
P3
H CC
#4 #4 FUEL FLOW
L DD


Page 372
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P2
A a
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #2 B b
A c
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #1
B d
P1
A u
CSDB INPUT
PORT #3 B v
A w CSDB DME/VOR
CSDB INPUT
PORT #1 1
B x
A y
CSDB INPUT
PORT #2 B z
P3
A p
CSDB INPUT
PORT #4 B q
P2
A A
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0A 3
B B
2
A C
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #1
B D
2
P3
1) POSITION
A w 2) RADAR
OUPUT PORT #2A 4 5
B x 4) DADC
5) AHRS
A y 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
ARINC 429/571 8) TAWS
OUPUT PORT #2B 4 5
B z
A AA
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #3 B BB
A r
ARINC 429/571
OUPUT PORT #0B 3
B s


429 LS.

Page 373
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P1
A a
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #0 1
B b
A c 1) POSITION
ARINC 429/571 2) RADAR
INPUT PORT #1 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B d
4) DADC
5) AHRS
ARINC 429/571 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
INPUT PORT #2 8) TAWS
B f
A g
ARINC 429/571
INPUT PORT #3 B h


Page 374
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P1
#1
OPEN/GND N
#2
OPEN/GND M
P2
#3
OPEN/GND w
ASCB
DISC #4
OPEN/GND PP
INPUT
STRAPS #5
OPEN/GND e
#6
OPEN/GND f
#7
OPEN/GND MM
#8
OPEN/GND LL
#1
OPEN/GND t
#2
OPEN/GND r
#3
OPEN/GND JJ
#4
OPEN/GND KK
ASCB
DISC P1
OUTPUT #5
STRAPS OPEN/GND NN
#6
OPEN/GND PP
P2
#7
28VDC/OPEN GG
#8
28VDC/OPEN NN 1
ASCB A + x
DATA y
-
ASCB A + z
CLOCK g
-
ASCB B + v
DATA
- HH
P3
ASCB B + E
CLOCK - F
1 DISCRETE OUTPUT #8 (28VDC/OPEN) IS SET WHEN THE FMS COMPUTED

GROSS WEIGHT EXCEEDS THE CONFIGURED TRIGGER WEIGHT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY
PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER
THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 375
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. Internal GPS Block Diagram
UNS-1C+/E FMS #1
P2
K, L INTERNAL GPS Tx
GPS Tx #1 TO FMS #2 (LS 429)
TO FMS #2 INTERNAL GPS Rx

INTERNAL M, N PORT #2 (LS 429)
GPS (XSIDE RAIM REQ)
GPS Rx #2 P, R FROM #2 FMS ARINC

Tx PORT #2A (LS 429)
GPS Rx #1
P1
INTERNAL GPS Tx TO FMS #3
Rx #0 a, b
(LS429)
ARINC
Rx
Rx #1 c, d GPS Tx FROM FMS #2
INTERNAL GPS (LS429)
Rx #2 e, f GPS Tx FROM FMS #3

(LS429)
P3
w, x TO FMS #3 INTERNAL GPS Rx

Tx #2A PORT #2 (LS 429)
ARINC
Tx 1
Tx #2B y, z
1 IF AN INTERNAL GPS IS INSTALLED, OUTPUT PORTS 2A & 2B MUST BE

CONFIGURED AS 429 LS.
Page 376
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. Multiple FMSs and FPCDU Wiring Diagrams
(1) Multiple FMSs
FMS #1 UNS-1C+/E FMS #2 UNS-1C+/E FMS #3 UNS-1C+/E

P2 P2
GPS ANTENNA
4 A P M A 2
INTERNAL GPS GPS 429 LS
RCV PORT #2 B R N B XMIT PORT #2A GPS ANTENNA
P1
3
INTERNAL GPS A K c A GPS ANTENNA
ARINC INPUT
XMIT PORT #1A B L d B PORT #1
2
P1 P2 GPS ANTENNA
3
ARINC INPUT A c K A INTERNAL GPS
PORT #1 B d L B XMIT PORT #1
P3
P2
INTERNAL GPS
4 1 K TIME
GPS 429 LS A M P A INTERNAL GPS MARK 5V PULSE
XMIT PORT #2A B N R B RCV PORT #2
P1 P1
P3 P3
A a e A INPUT PORT #2
INTERNAL GPS INTERNAL GPS GPS XMIT 6
TIME MARK K 1 1 K TIME MARK #1 B b f B (ARINC LS 429)
5V PULSE 5V PULSE (429 LS)
GPS ANTENNA a A GPS XMIT #1

INPUT PORT A e
6
2 #2 B f b B (429 LS)
GPS ANTENNA (429 LS)
P1
A a c A ARINC INPUT
GPS XMIT #1 6
(429 LS) B b d B PORT #1
P2
A e K A INTERNAL GPS
INPUT PORT #2 6
(429 LS) B f L B XMIT PORT #1
P3
OUTPUT PORT A w P A
6 INTERNAL GPS
#2A B x R B RCV PORT #2
(429 LS)
1 INTERNAL GPS TIME MARK IS USED IN SPECIAL MISSION APPLICATIONS WHERE

SYNCHRONIZATION WITH EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT IS DESIRED.
2 REFER TO EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANTENNA RECOMMENDATIONS.
3 #1 UNS-1C+/E INTERNAL GPS TRANSMITS TO #2 UNS-1C+/E LS 429.
#2 UNS-1C+/E INTERNAL GPS TRANSMITS TO #1 UNS-1C+/E LS 429.
4 #1 UNS-1C+/E INTERNAL GPS RECEIVES #2 UNS-1C+/E LS 429.
#2 UNS-1C+/E INTERNAL GPS RECEIVES #1 UNS-1C+/E LS 429.
6 THESE CONNECTIONS ARE USED ONLY WHEN A THIRD UNS-1C+/E IS INSTALLED.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON

EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS
CORPORATION.
Page 377
34-60-22 1 May 2012
H. Falcon 2000 / Astra SPX Dual FMS
(1) Wiring Diagram 1 of 5 - Falcon/Astra SPX Dual FMS
P1
5VDC OR 5VAC
k PANEL
PANEL
LIGHTING n 2 2
28VDC
m
PANEL
28VDC IN j 2 5 28VDC A/C BUS
DC RETURN i 2
(P/N 10171)
UNC
GND H 24AWG BROWN CONFIGURATION
CONFIG +5VDC G 24AWG RED MODULE
MODULE DATA CLK F 24AWG YELLOW
DATA I/O E 24AWG BLUE 4 5
P2
CHASSIS GND J 1
POWER CONTROL FF 6
DISCRETE
3
DTU 100
P3 P1 (P/N 1406-XX-X)
28VDC
NN AIRCRAFT M 28VDC
1 INPUT
BUS
PP P DC RETURN
P2
+ a A + ETHERNET
ETHERNET
TX B - RX CH1
- v
+ A C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX D - TX CH1
- b
--------OPTIONAL PORTABLE DTU DETAIL--------

(P/N 1407-XX-XX)
PORTABLE DTU
7 P/N 1407-XX-X
J1 P1
22 12 12 DC RETURN
AIRCRAFT
+28VDC 22 13 13 28 VDC IN
1
BUS
7
J2 P2
A A + ETHERNET
TO B B - RX CH0
FMS
C C + ETHERNET
D D - TX CH0
P P SHIELD
1. ALL WIRING IS 22 A.W.G. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2 CDU LIGHTING POWER INPUT (5 OR 28VDC) USE ONE OR THE OTHER, NOT BOTH.
3 REFER TO DETAIL FOR PORTABLE DTU 100 OPTION.
4 CONFIGURATION MODULE TO BE WIRED TO THE NCU CONNECTOR THROUGH A PIGTAIL.
5 THE CONFIGURATION MODULE WILL BE PROGRAMMED THROUGH THE NCU.
6 THIS DISCRETE IS GROUND WHEN FMS IS ON.
7 THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 REPRESENTS A WIRINGHARNESS
THAT IS PART OF THE PORTABLE DTU.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON

EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 378
34-60-22 1 May 2012
UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-XXX GPS
ANTENNA
8
GPS
ANTENNA
ARINC 429/571 UNS-1E P/N 2017-XX-X2X
OUTPUT PORT #10
P3 P3
7
A AA LL A INPUT (ARINC
(ARINC OUTPUT
429 HS) PORT #3 B BB MM B PORT#7 429 HS)
(XFILL) (XFILL 1)
6
6
A LL AA A
(ARINC INPUT OUTPUT 7
429 HS) PORT #7 B MM BB B PORT #3
(XFILL 1)
P2 P2
A M M A OUTPUT (ARINC
(ARINC OUTPUT
B N N B PORT #2A 429 LS)
429 LS) PORT 2A
P3
P3
K GPS 1 TIME MARK
GPS 1 TIME MARK K
P2
P2 K A GPS XMIT 1A
4
L B (429 LS)
GPS XMIT 1A A K
4
(429 LS)
B L P A GPS RCVR 2
B 5
R (429 LS)
GPS RCVR 2 A P
5 (429 LS)
B R P1
c INPUT
P1 A (ARINC
PORT #1 GPS
d B LS 429)
GPS #1 ANTENNA
INPUT 8
A c
(ARINC PORT #1
LS 429) GPS #2 B d GPS
ANTENNA
1. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
2. GPS RCVR 1 IS INTERNALLY WIRED TO THE ONSIDE FMS ARINC 429 LS OUTPUT PORT 2A.
3. ONSIDE GPS SENSOR INPUT IS INTERNALLY WIRED TO THE FMS ARINC 429 LS INPUT PORT 0.
4 FMS 1 GPS TRANSMITS TO FMS 2

FMS 2 GPS TRANSMITS TO FMS 1
5 GPS 1 RECEIVES FMS 2 LS A429

GPS 2 RECEIVES FMS 1 LS A429
6 XFILL 1 (HS): FMS 1 RECEIVES FMS 2

FMS 2 RECEIVES FMS 1
7 XFILL (HS): FMS 1 TRANSMITS FMS 2

FMS 2 TRANSMITS FMS 1
8 GPS ANTENNA IS A 5 VOLT ACTIVE.

Page 379
34-60-22 1 May 2012
P3
RED U
RED RTN V
EXTERNAL GREEN W
VIDEO GREEN RTN X
INPUT BLUE Y 1
BLUE RTN Z
SYNC u
SYNC RTN t
REV TUNE ENABLE BOTH RTUS OFF = GND

R EITHER OR BOTH RTUS ON = OPEN
(DISCRETE 8 IN)
ATC1 SELECT P ATC 1 SELECT = GND
(DISCRETE 9 IN) STBY & ATC2 SELECT = OPEN
ARINC 429 LS A y
GENERAL PURPOSE LS 429 OUTPUTS
OUTPUT PORT #2B
B z
P2
A v
ARINC 429 HS GPIRS1/IRS #1
INPUT PORT #14 B HH
ARINC 429 HS A GG
INPUT PORT #13 GPIRS2/IRS #2
B NN
P1
ARINC 429 LS A e
SPARE
INPUT PORT #2
B f
ARINC 429 LS A g
SPARE
INPUT PORT #3
B h
ARINC 429 HS A NN
INPUT PORT #12 GPIRS3/IRS #3
B PP
#2 FMS SELECT EE 2
ANALOG TEST
DD OPEN = NORMAL, GND = TEST
DISCRETE
FREQ MGMT ENABLE GG

(DISCRETE 7)
1 EXTERNAL RGB VIDEO INPUT ALLOWING NCU TO BE USED AS A

DISPLAY FOR CAMERAS ETC.)
2 ONLY GROUND P1 EE FOR FMS #2

Page 380
34-60-22 1 May 2012
FMS #1
P2
OUTPUT 1
(ARINC A A L/P5-75
PORT #0A L-FMS-1 LEFT ICC-4005
429 HS) L/P5-76
(IOC) B B
OUTPUT 2
A C P1-1H
(ARINC PORT #1 LEFT MFD-4077
L-FMS-2
429 HS) (ONSIDE B D P1-1G
MFD)
OUTPUT 3
(ARINC A z P1-1H
PORT #5
L-FMS-6 RIGHT MFD-4077
429 HS) (OFFSIDE P1-1G
B g
MFD)
(ARINC INPUT A w
LS 429/ SPARE
PORT #9
571) B PP
P1
(ARINC A N
INPUT
LS 429/ OPTIONAL AFIS INPUT
PORT #8
571) B M
P3
INPUT 4
(ARINC PORT #5 A GG R/P5-77
HS 429) RB-IOC-4 RIGHT ICC-4005
(OFFSIDE B HH R/P5-78
IOC)
INPUT 5
(ARINC PORT #6 A JJ
HS 429) (ONSIDE B KK
IOC)
INPUT 6
(ARINC PORT #4 A EE L/P5-69
LA-IOC-4 LEFT ICC-4005
HS 429) (ONSIDE
B FF L/P5-70
DME & FF)
1 CONFIGURE OUTPUT PORT #0 AS P4-03-IOC
2 CONFIGURE OUTPUT PORT #1 AS P4-02-MAP A
3 CONFIGURE OUTPUT PORT #5 AS P4-02-MAP B
4 CONFIGURE INPUT PORT #5 AS P4-06-OFFSD. IF IRS IS HDG SOURCE; P4-05 OFFSD

IF AHRS IS HDG SOURCE.
5 CONFIGURE INPUT PORT #6 AS P4-06-ONSD. IF IRS IS HDG SOURCE; P4-05 ONSD IF

AHRS IS HDG SOURCE.
6 CONFIGURE INPUT PORT #4 AS P4-L-AUX.

Page 381
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) Wiring Diagram 5 of 5 - Falcon/Aster SPX Dual FMS
FMS #2
P2
OUTPUT 1
(ARINC A A R/P5-75
PORT #0A R-FMS-1 RIGHT ICC-4005
429 HS) R/P5-76
(IOC) B B
OUTPUT 2
A C P1-15H
(ARINC PORT #1 RIGHT MFD-4077
R-FMS-2
429 HS) (ONSIDE B D P1-15G
MFD)
OUTPUT 3
(ARINC A z P1-15H
PORT #5
R-FMS-6 LEFT MFD-4077
429 HS) (OFFSIDE P1-15G
B g
MFD)
(ARINC INPUT A w
LS 429/ SPARE
PORT #9
571) B PP
P1
(ARINC A N
INPUT
LS 429/ OPTIONAL AFIS INPUT
PORT #8
571) B M
P3
INPUT 4
(ARINC PORT #5 A GG L/P5-77
HS 429) LB-IOC-4 LEFT ICC-4005
(OFFSIDE B HH L/P5-78
IOC)
INPUT 5
(ARINC A JJ
PORT #6
HS 429) (ONSIDE B KK
IOC)
INPUT 6
(ARINC PORT #4 A EE R/P5-69
RA-IOC-4 RIGHT ICC-4005
HS 429) (ONSIDE
B FF R/P5-70
DME & FF)
1 CONFIGURE OUTPUT PORT #0 AS P4-03-IOC

2 CONFIGURE OUTPUT PORT #1 AS P4-02-MAP A
3 CONFIGURE OUTPUT PORT #5 AS P4-02-MAP B
4 CONFIGURE INPUT PORT #5 AS P4-06-OFFSD. IF IRS IS HDG SOURCE; P4-05

OFFSD IF AHRS IS HDG SOURCE.
5 CONFIGURE INPUT PORT #6 AS P4-06-ONSD. IF IRS IS HDG SOURCE; P4-05

ONSD IF AHRS IS HDG SOURCE.
6 CONFIGURE INPUT PORT #4 AS P4-R-AUX.

Page 382
34-60-22 1 May 2012
System Data Installation

System data installation and system configuration instructions are contained in Report No. 34-60-26,
System Data Installation FMS Configuration Manual for SCN 800/900 and Subsequent.
Page 401
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting

1. Maintenance
A. UNS-1E Flight Management System (FMS), P/N 2017-XX-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the FMS. Maintenance is not required unless a problem is
found.
B. UNS-1C+ Flight Management System (FMS), P/N 10172-XX-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the FMS. Maintenance is not required unless a problem is
found.
C. Configuration Module, P/N 10171
Do not schedule maintenance for the Configuration Module. Maintenance is not required
unless a problem is found.
D. 5-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit (FPCDU), P/N 1018-XX or 1018-X-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the FPCDU. Maintenance is not required unless a problem
is found.
E. 4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit ( FPCDU), P/N 1117-XX or 1117-X-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the FPCDU. Maintenance is not required unless a problem
is found.
F. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100), P/N 1406-XX or 1407-XX
Do not schedule maintenance for the DTU-100. Maintenance is not required unless a problem
is found.
G. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-00-X or 1409-00-2
Do not schedule maintenance for the SSDTU. Maintenance is not required unless a problem
is found.
2. Checkout
A copy of this section may be made for recording the results of checkout of the Flight
Management System. Mark the PASS or FAIL spaces and fill in the blanks as appropriate.
The contents of this section constitute the minimum Return to Service Procedures.
Perform these checks when installing a new or repaired component of the Flight Management
System or related avionics equipment. The aircraft’s navigational configuration must be
known prior to check out the Flight Management System.
If the equipment fails any check, refer to the Troubleshooting section for corrective
troubleshooting procedures.
Page 501
34-60-22 1 May 2012
A. CDU / FMS Self-Test
These functional and self-tests should be performed after replacement of the FMS and/or the
4-Inch or 5-Inch FPCDU.
(1) Ensure that all system component connectors are connected and units are seated in
mounting racks where applicable. For GPS tests the aircraft must be located outside
the hangar and the antenna must have an unobstructed view of the sky.
(2) Reset any circuit breakers that may have been opened for replacement.
(3) Ensure that 28 VDC primary power is available on the bus supplying power to the
FMS.
(4) Ensure that 26 VAC power is available on the bus(es) that supply reference voltages
to the FMS.
(5) Ensure that the Air Data Computer system and Air Data Converter (if installed) are
powered up and functioning.
(6) Ensure that the Heading source system supplying heading data to the FMS is powered
up and valid.
(7) Select FMS for display on the flight instruments.
(8) Ensure that power for the FMS system annunciators is available and tested.
(9) Turn on all sensors having independent power control such as IRS.
(10) Push [ON/OFF DIM] on the CDU. After about a five-second warmup, the self-test
page will be displayed.
Pass Fail
(11) The aircraft type will appear on line two. Check for correct aircraft type.
Pass Fail
(12) Check that all items on the self-test page display “PASS”.
Pass Fail
Record failures:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
(13) Observe system annunciators during self-test. The following annunciators, which are
remote from the CDU, should illuminate for about 45 seconds during FMS self-test.
WPT ALERT (Waypoint Alert) Pass Fail N/A
SXTK (Selected Crosstrack) Pass Fail N/A
APPR (Approach) Pass Fail N/A
HDG (Heading) Pass Fail N/A
MSG (Message) Pass Fail N/A
GPS INTEG (GPS Integrity) Pass Fail N/A
Page 502
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(14) During the self-tests, with the FMS selected for display on the HSI, verify the
following indications:
NAV FLAG – pulls out of view during self-test Pass Fail N/A
TO/FR FLAG – indicates TO condition Pass Fail N/A
COURSE POINTER – slews to 045 degrees Pass Fail N/A
BEARING POINTER – slews to 135 degrees Pass Fail N/A
LATERAL DEVIATION – moves 1 dot right (3.75 NM) Pass Fail N/A
VERTICAL DEVIATION – moves 1 dot up (1600 ft.) Pass Fail N/A
DISTANCE DISPLAY – shows 123.4 NM (or 123) Pass Fail N/A
ROLL COMMAND – 10 degree right bank Pass Fail N/A
NOTES: 1. Indications may differ with some equipment types and EFIS
Installations.
2. The terms Desired Track and Course Pointer are used interchangeably.
3. The terms Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and Lateral Deviation
Needle are used interchangeably.
4. The terms Glide Slope Needle and Vertical Deviation Needle are used
interchangeably.
Record any discrepancies:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
NOTE: After completion of self-tests, the CDU will display the copyright page
followed by the Initialization page [INIT 1/1].
(15) Push [MSG] to display any system messages. Verify that no “fail” messages or
“Demonstration Mode” messages are displayed. “Position Uncertain” is normal until
the system has been initialized. If any fail messages are displayed, refer to the
Messages Section in the Operator’s Manual for possible causes. Push [MSG] again to
return to the INIT 1/1 page.
Pass Fail
(16) With the cursor over the ID field, type the identifier of the airport reference point for
the local airfield and push [ENTER]. The latitude and longitude of the field should be
displayed. Push ACCEPT [5L] or [ENTER] to initialize the position. The cursor will
advance to the date field.
(17) If the date is correct push [ENTER] or type the date numbers (DDMMYY), then push
[ENTER]. The cursor will advance to the UTC field.
(18) If the time is correct, push [ENTER] or type the time numbers (HHMM), then push
[ENTER]. The cursor will advance to the ACCEPT line select location. Push
ACCEPT [5L].
Page 503
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(19) Fill in the following blanks with information from the last two lines of the INIT 1/1
page.
NAV DATABASE EXPIRES ________________________
FMC VER ____________________________
NOTE: The FMS may be tested with an expired database.
(20) Push [DATA] four times to display the DATA 4/4 page. Verify that the correct
aircraft heading is displayed in the HDG data field.
Pass Fail
(21) Manually slew the heading off 10 degrees using the slave switch. Verify that the
heading tracks correctly in both directions.
Pass Fail N/A
(22) Push [NEXT] to display the DATA 1/4 page and push MAINT [5R] to display the
MAINT 1/1 page. From MAINT 1/1 push S/W VERS [5L] and observe the version
identification of the various software installed on the system. The FMC version
should match the version approved for the installation in the Airplane Flight Manual
Supplement or other approved documentation. Record the software versions below.
FMC ______________________________
CDU ______________________________
AUX ______________________________
ANA ______________________________
RRS ______________________________
BSTRP ______________________________
ARINC ______________________________
ASCB ______________________________
RTU ______________________________
Pass Fail
(23) Activate the panel lighting system that powers the CDU faceplate lighting for the
FMS and verify proper operation.
Pass Fail
Page 504
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. CDU Keyboard Dimming and Display Offset
BRIGHT®
DIM®
CANCEL®
DISPLAY®
OFF/STBY®
Dimming Control Window

(1) With any page displayed, push [ON/OFF DIM]. Verify the dimming control window
is shown on the right side of the active page with the options BRIGHT [1R], DIM
[2R], CANCEL [3R], DISPLAY [4R] and OFF/STBY [5R].
Pass Fail
(2) Alternately push and hold BRIGHT [1R] and DIM [2R]. Verify that the display
brightens and dims.
Pass Fail
(3) Press DISPLAY [4R], then push and hold UP [1R] and DOWN [2R]. Verify that the
display moves up and down and can be adjusted to minimize parallax between the
arrows and line select keys.
Pass Fail
(4) Push [ON/OFF DIM] or any mode key to return to the previous display.
C. FMS Configuration Verification
The FMS’s Configuration Module was programmed to allow the FMS to interface with the
installed sensors, databases, etc. The CDU will display which aircraft hardware the
Configuration Module is programmed.
To verify proper programming, check the Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets against the
CDU configuration displays. Refer to the applicable Configuration Module Programming
Procedures located in the FMS Configuration Manual for SCN 800/900 and Subsequent,
Report No. 34-60-26.
Pass Fail
Page 505
34-60-22 1 May 2012
D. Static Test
Selected analog and discrete static tests are available while the aircraft is on the ground.
NOTE: The static test may not function correctly with some EFIS installations.
The static tests are selected from the maintenance page and confirm data exchange
synchronization between the aircraft and FMS during operation. Static tests verify two
sources of output: analog and digital.
(1) Analog Tests
Analog tests are available only for NCUs equipped with an analog board.
(P/N 2017-XX-211 and 10172-XX-X1X)
(a) From DATA 1/4, press the MAINT line select key and then select STATIC
TEST from MAINT 1/1.
(b) Outputs to the flight guidance system are checked by pressing each line select
key and verifying the proper display on the HSI or ADI.
NOTE: Each option must be turned off by again pressing the line select key before
a new option can be tested.
ANALOG TESTS 1/2
BEARING 90 Pass Fail N/A
DSRTK 90 Pass Fail N/A
XTK LEFT Pass Fail N/A
XTK RIGHT Pass Fail N/A
XTK CENTER Pass Fail N/A
(c) Press [NEXT] for ANALOG TESTS 2/2.

ANALOG TESTS 2/2
VERT UP Pass Fail N/A
VERT DN Pass Fail N/A
VERT CTR Pass Fail N/A
TO Pass Fail N/A
FROM Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 20 DEG R Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 20 DEG L Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 0 DEG Pass Fail N/A
(d) Press RETURN for STATIC TEST 1/1.
Page 506
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(2) Discrete Tests
(a) Press the DISCRETE line select key. DISCRETE 1/2 is displayed. Each
discrete is labeled as it was configured and can be tested.
DISCRETE TST 1/2
DISC OUT 1 Pass Fail N/A
(b) Press [NEXT] for DISCRETE TESTS 2/2.

DISCRETE TST 2/2
Page 507
34-60-22 1 May 2012
3. Interface Tests
A. HSI
(1) Press the DTO key then the LIST key. The LIST 1/10 page with VOR/PLT waypoints
will be displayed.
(2) Select any one of the waypoints by entering its corresponding number at the cursor
and pressing ENTER twice. NAV 1/2 will be displayed.
(3) Verify the desired track, bearing, distance and crosstrack (XTK) displayed on the HSI
is the same as on the CDU.
Pass Fail
(4) On DATA page 2 press the ADC line select key to display ADC 1/1.
(5) Press the line select key next to the TAS field and enter 100. Press ENTER.
NOTE: GPS and INS must be deselected before entering TAS as 100.
(6) On NAV page 1/3 verify that the groundspeed displayed on the CDU matches that on
the HSI (if the HSI supports this option).
Pass Fail N/A
B. Winds Display (EFIS Only)
(1) Display NAV 1/2.
(2) Select Wind Display on the EFIS. Verify that the winds displayed on the HSI
correspond to those on the CDU.
Pass Fail N/A
(3) Turn the FMS off, then on before proceeding with additional tests.
C. DME Interface
Valid DME signals must be received by the DME or RRS system when testing the DME
interface. Local DME station signals, if available on the ground, are adequate to verify
operation of the interface. Otherwise, a DME signal generator is required. Manual signal
generators capable of providing DME test frequencies of 108.00 and 108.05 can also provide
a lock-on and DME test of the DDC frequency of 108.20. Otherwise, a generator capable of
manually tuning this frequency should be used.
(1) If a local DME station can be received at the aircraft’s location, turn on and initialize
the FMS to the local airport reference point identifier. If a DME signal cannot be
received and a ramp tester is used, initialize the FMS to KDDC.
(2) Select DATA page 2. Press the DME line select key to display DME 1/1 page. Verify
that the STATUS field displays NORMAL (D).
(3) Press the SELECT DME line select key. The (D) will extinguish and the DME
identifiers will change on a four-second interval as the DME scan tunes to stations in
the area.
Page 508
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(4) Press the MAN DME line select key to place the cursor over the data field.
(5) Press the LIST key to display a list of DME stations in the area. If local DME is used,
choose the local DME from the list. If a signal generator is used and the FMS was
initialized to KDDC, select DDC from the list and press ENTER.
(6) Verify that the local distance to station or distance provided by the DME generator is
displayed.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail ❏ N/A
(7) If the FMS was initialized to KDDC, turn it off and then on again and initialize to the
local airport reference point to prevent confusion.
NOTE: The following steps apply to TACAN (RRS only).
(8) Display DATA page 2 (if applicable).
(9) Select TACAN Status page.
(10) Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
(11) Compare distance displayed on CDU with aircraft TACAN distance.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
D. VOR (without RRS)
(1) From DATA page 2 press the VOR line select key.
(2) Verify that the frequency displayed in the FREQ field corresponds to the active
frequency of the appropriate Nav Control Head.
E. DTU-100
NOTES: 1. This test can only be performed on the ground.
2. It is necessary to have the correct Jeppesen Database disk.
(1) Turn on the DTU-100. Power to the DTU-100 is indicated by the green light above
the power button.
(2) From DATA page 1 press the DISK line select key.
(3) Insert the data disk into the DTU-100.
(4) Press DISK CONTENTS line select key.
(5) Verify that the DTU-100 reads the disk and the disk information is displayed on the
CDU.
Page 509
34-60-22 1 May 2012
F. SSDTU
NOTE: This test can only be performed on the ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to have a correct Universal Database on a USB or Secure Digital
(SD) data storage device.
(1) From DATA page 1 press the DISK line select key.
(2) Insert a mass storage device into the SSDTU.
(3) Press DISK CONTENTS line select key.
(4) Verify that the SSDTU reads the storage device and that database information is
displayed on the FMS CDU.
(5) Verify indicators are illuminated in accordance with the following table.
Indicator Color and Action
Indicator
Type Blank Green Green Amber Blue Blue
Solid Blinking Solid Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self Test N/A
(Front) detected an
error (SSDTU
will reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, in Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported use (Indicates being
accessed device Primary accessed
Storage
Device)
SD No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, in Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported use (Indicates being
accessed device Primary accessed
Storage
Device)
NET Not yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) operational
Ethernet No device A network link Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present is established activity
on this port
Page 510
34-60-22 1 May 2012
G. Approach Mode
NOTE: This test does not operate correctly on some EFIS types.
(1) Turn on and initialize the FMS (position does not matter for this test).
(2) From DATA page 1, press the MAINT line select key.
(3) From MAINT 1/1, press the DYNAMIC TEST line select key.
(4) From DYNAMIC TEST 1/1 press the APPROACH line select key.
(5) As the test begins, select the proper mode of the flight director.
NOTE: The radio altimeter should be disabled for vertical coupling.
(6) As the CDI returns to center, Nav mode will capture.
(7) As the glideslope needle returns to center, the glideslope function will capture.
(8) The V-bars will follow the lateral and vertical commands as specified for the test.
(9) The glideslope flag comes into view during FLAG VERT test.
(10) The lateral mode of the flight director drops during FLAG STEER test
(if roll steering for approach).
(11) Nav flag drops into view during NAV FLAG test.
Page 511
34-60-22 1 May 2012
4. Sensors Checkout
A. IRS
NOTE: Inertial Reference System must be in Nav mode before conducting the following tests.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for any IRS.
(2) From IRS 1/1 note the following:
Status Hdg
1. _______________________ _______
2. _______________________ _______
3. _______________________ _______
B. GPIRS
(1) From DATA 2/4, press the line select key for IRS/GPS.
(2) From GPIRS1 1/3 note the following:
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
#SATS __________ HIL __________
INTEG__________
(3) If additional GPIRS are installed, repeat the above procedure selecting the appropriate
IRS/GPS.
GPIRS2
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
#SATS __________ HIL __________
INTEG__________
GPIRS3
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
#SATS __________ HIL __________
INTEG__________
Page 512
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. LORAN C
NOTE: Aircraft must be outside for this test.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for LCS.
(2) From LCS 1/3 note the following:
Status (NAV, Noncert or Search) _____________________________
LOA (Inside or Outside) ____________________________________
GRI Stations
__________ __________
__________ __________
__________ __________
D. GPS/GNSS-1
NOTE: Aircraft must be outside for this test.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for GPS1.
(2) From GPS 1/4 note the following:
GPS (ACQ, ALT, NAV) __________ EPU __________
#SATS ________________________ INTEG __________
HIL ___________________________ 273 __________
277 ___________________________
E. UASC Radio Reference Sensor (RRS)
NOTE: The following Checkout Procedures may be accomplished in flight and all data can
be compared to aircraft DME, VOR and (if applicable) TACAN.
(1) Display DATA page 2.
(2) Select VOR Status page.
(3) Tune test station by frequency (Test) or by ID (line select key adjacent to IDENT).
Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
F. Air Data
NOTE: This test requires the use of a pitot/static tester and approved procedures.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the ADC line select key.
(2) With pitot static test unit applied to the aircraft, run the airspeed up to approximately
200 knots. Confirm that the TAS displayed on the CDU is correct.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
Page 513
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) Change the baro setting on the appropriate altimeter and confirm that the baro-altitude
reading on the CDU coincides with the altimeter reading.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
(4) Confirm that the SAT displayed on the CDU is reasonable.
(5) Turn off FMS and turn it back on before proceeding with additional tests.
G. Fuel Flow
(1) Press the FUEL key until FUEL 5/5 is displayed.
(2) With all engines running, ensure that the fuel flow displayed on the CDU matches the
aircraft’s fuel flow gauges. Check this on at least two different power settings.
H. GPIRS
(1) GPIRS Status
GPIR1 1/3
gps HYB [D] irs NAV [D]
q 01 hdg 101Ø
#sata 06
integ RAIM set hdg ---ø
hil 0.06nm select
velocity irs ®
fms1 s123 e420 select
irs s124 e421 gps ®
gps s123 e422
hyb s125 e423 RETURN®
GPIR1 1/3
This page is accessed from DATA page 2 and provides data on the GPS and IRS
sensors.
NOTE: The page layout may differ in some installations.
Status (GPS)
HYB Navigation mode is using hybrid position from IRS and GPS.
NAV GPS position alone is being used without IRS aiding.
ALT Altitude aiding mode (ADC altitude being used to supplement poor
satellite geometry).
INIT GPS/IRS is initializing position.
ACQ GPS is acquiring satellite for navigation.
TEST GPS is in test mode.
FAIL GPS has failed or no 429 data is being received.
Page 514
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Status (IRS)
NAV IRS has correctly aligned and is in NAV.
ALIGN IRS is in alignment mode.
FAIL No ARINC 429 data received from GPIRS or else GPIRS is sending
FAIL status on the 429 bus.
ATT IRS is in ATTITUDE mode. Sensor will not be used for navigation.
This page will also show number of satellites being tracked as well as the North and
East component velocities from the IRS, GPS, FMD and HYBrid IRS/GPS.
SET HDG (2R). The value entered is displayed and transmitted on ARINC 429 label
043 for 12 seconds. Then dashes are displayed in the field again and label stops
transmitting. This is used for setting IRS heading when in ATT mode. The display
will indicate ° (degree symbol) for magnetic and T for true heading.
The GPS and IRS can be independently selected or deselected from this page.
(2) GPIRS Comparison Page
GPIR1 2/3
fms1 pos irs pos
n 33 54.0 n 33 54.8
w 117 57.3 w 117 57.8
diff n 00 00.8
w 000 00.5
¬GPS 20.2 irs 15.2®
¬HYB 20.7
RETURN®
GPIR1 2/3
This page is similar to DATA 3/4 but only HYB, GPS and IRS positions are shown
for comparison to FMS positions. Pushing the line select key next to GPS, HYB or
IRS will display that position in the upper right hand field and show the difference
from the FMS position.
Page 515
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(3) GPIRS Diagnostics Page
GPIR1 3/3
gpirs diagnostics
270 08DA10
273 056789
274 8745AF
350 604344
352 873243
353 6A7EC2
355 05A5A5
RETURN®
GPIR1 3/3
This page shows contents of ARINC 429 labels from GPIRS as shown in left hand
column. Data is in hexadecimal and is for diagnostic purposes only.
(4) GPIRS Diagnostics
GPIRS BUS 270 – IRS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Transmission Rate: 500 milliseconds
GPIRS Diagnostic Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits SDI 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Status bit meanings if set to one:

Bit 17: IRS on DC power
Bit 15: IRS attitude is invalid, IRS is failed
Bit 13: IRS in NAV (navigation mode)
Bit 12: IRS in ARR (attitude mode)
Bit 11: IRS in ALIGN mode
Where MM is 0: 0 = valid
else = invalid
Where P is bit which causes sum of 32 bits to be odd.
GPIRS BUS 273 – Autonomous GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Page 516
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(5) GPIRS Autonomous GPS Status Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

Bit 29: Reserved
Bit 28:
000 = Self-Test
001 = Initialization
010 = Acquisition
011 = Navigation
100 = Altitude Aiding
101 = Spare
110 = Spare
111 = Fault
Bit 25
Bit 23
Bit 19
Bit 15: Secondary IRS/FMS source used
Bit 14: IRS/FMS not present
Bit 13: Secondary DADS source used
Bit 12: DADS not present
Bit 11
else = invalid
GPIRS BUS 274 – Hybrid GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Page 517
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(6) GPIRS Hybrid GPS Status Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

Bit 29: Reserved
Bit 28
000 = Self-Test
001 = Initialization
010 = Acquisition
011 = Navigation
100 = Altitude Aiding
101 = Spare
110 = Spare
111 = Fault
Bit 25
Bit 23
Bit 19: Active GPSSU Source:
0 = GPSSU #1
1 = GPSSU #2
Bit 18
00 = Valid
01 = Inactive
10 = Functional Test
11 = Fail
Bit 16
00 = Valid
01 = Inactive
10 = Functional Test
11 = Fail
Bit 14
else = invalid
Page 518
34-60-22 1 May 2012
I. UASC GPS/GNSS
Except where indicated, this checkout applies to the internal GPS and GPS-1000:
(1) Test Preparation
(2) Apply aircraft power to the FMS and GPS sensor(s) system.
(3) Power up the FMS and initialize by verifying or entering proper date, time and
present position.
(4) Access DATA 2/n page (sensor select page) and select GPS. GPS 1/3 page will
appear.
(5) Status will display either ACQ (acquiring) or INIT (initializing).
NOTE: At times it may take up to 30 minutes to acquire a valid almanac from the
satellites present.
(6) Wait until NAVB appears on GPS 1/3 status page.
GPS1 1/4 Status Page (also applies to GNSS and GLS)
GPS1 1/4
stat NAV [D] address
q 01 -----
#sats 06 data
integ RADIO ----
hil 0.06nm select
hdop 1.57 gps only®
vdop 2.46
273 063580 select gps®
277 000000
ver 0001 RETURN®
GPS1 1/4 Status Page

NOTE: GPS label 277 shown on the screen above applies only to the internal GPS
and GPS-1000.
NOTE: The page layout may be different in some installations.
(a) GPS Status:
NAV GPS is NAV mode
ACQ GPS is acquiring satellites
INIT GPS is initializing first position from internal almanac
ALT GPS is using altitude to compensate for poor satellite geometry
TEST GPS is in TEST mode
FAIL GPS has failed or 429 data is not received from GPS
(b) GPS Q factors: These are error estimates in tenths of nautical miles (a Q factor of 01
is equal to 0.1 NM circular error estimate). A Q factor of 99 indicates that the sensor
is not usable by the FMS.
Page 519
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(c) # SATELLITES: The number of satellites currently being tracked by the GPS.
This page shows ARINC 429 data on labels 273 and 277 from the GPS sensor. The
operator may enter a five-digit hex ADDRESS field to view four-digit hex data in
DATA field. This page is to be used for diagnostics and troubleshooting. HDOP and
VDOP are for reference only.
(d) SELECT/DESELECT GPS: Used to manually select or deselect the GPS sensor.
(e) Label 273 GPS Sensor Status (discrete)
APPROX. RESOLUTION N/A UNITS: N/A
MAXIMUM VALUE N/A DATA FORMAT: TBD
MINIMUM VALUE N/A FULL SCALE: N/A
Page 520
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Label 273 GPS Sensor Status (discrete)
FIELD BIT BIT DESCRIPTION
NAME WEIGHT NUMBER
LABEL 01 1 CODE = 273 OCTAL
02 0
03 1
04 1
05 1
06 0
07 1
08 1
6th 1 09 0 SPARE
2 10 0 SPARE
4 11 0 MSB of Satellite Visible (16X)
1 > 15 visible; 0
8 12 0 DADC STATUS
0 = PRESENT, 1 = NOT PRESENT
5th 1 13 X DADC SOURCE
0 = PRIMARY, 1 = SECONDARY
2 14 X FMS STATUS
0 = PRESENT, 1 = NOT PRESENT
4 15 X FMS SOURCE
0 = PRIMARY, 1 = SECONDARY
8 16 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (1X) LSB
4th 1 17 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (2X)
2 18 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (4X)
4 19 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (8X) MSB
(See bit number 11)
8 20 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (1X) LSB
3rd 1 21 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (2X)
2 22 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (4X)
4 23 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (8X) MSB
(See bit number 29)
8 24 X SPARE
2nd 1 25 X SPARE
2 26 X GPS OPERATIONAL MODE Note 1
1st 1 29 X MSB of SATELLITES TRACKED (16X) 1 > 15
tracked; 0
2 30 X SSM Note
4 31 X SSM Note
8 32 X PARITY (ODD)
NOTE: The meanings of the bit combinations for GPS OPERATIONAL MODE and SSM are shown in
the following tables.
Page 521
34-60-22 1 May 2012
GPS OPERATIONAL MODE

BIT 28 BIT 27 BIT 26 MEANING
0 0 0 SELF TEST MODE
0 0 1 INITIALIZATION MODE
0 1 0 ACQUISITION MODE
0 1 1 NAVIGATION MODE
1 0 0 ALTITUDE AIDING MODE
1 0 1 SPARE
1 1 0 SPARE
1 1 1 FAULT
BIT 31 BIT 30 MEANING

0 0 NORMAL OPERATION
0 1 NO COMPUTED DATA
1 0 FUNCTIONAL TEST
1 1 NOT USED
Page 522
34-60-22 1 May 2012
(e) Label 277 GPS Diagnostics
This label applies to the internal GPS and GPS-1000.
APPROX. RESOLUTION N/A UNITS: N/A
MAXIMUM VALUE N/A DATA FORMAT: TBD
MINIMUM VALUE N/A FULL SCALE: N/A
277 GPS Diagnostics

DIGIT BIT BIT NO. DESCRIPTION
WEIGHT
1 1 Octal Label = 277
2 2
1 3
2 4
4 5
1 6
2 7
4 8
th
6 1 9 Unused
2 10 Unused
4 11 Unused
8 12 Unused
th
5 1 13 Unused
2 14 Unused
4 15 Unused
8 16 Low Battery Voltage (for Sensor II battery backed up RAM)
th
4 1 17 ARINC Receiver Parity Errors
2 18 Noisy Interrupt Exception
4 19 Spurious Interrupt Exception
8 20 Uninitiated Interrupt Exception
rd
3 1 21 Bus Error, Address Error, Illegal Instruction, Privilege Violation or
Divide By Zero Trap Exception
2 22 Message Negatively or Not Acknowledged by Sensor II
4 23 Satellite Status, GPS Satellite Range Residual, Satellite
Measurement Data, Ephemeris, Data, Almanac Data or MEC
Support Message Not Received from Sensor II
8 24 GPS Pos Data, GPS Lat/Lon or GPS Pos Fix Sol/Variables or
Binary Position Data Message Not Received from Sensor II
nd
2 1 25 Sensor II Communications Failure
2 26 ARINC Transmitter or Receiver Failure
4 27 RAM Addressing or Data Storage Failure
8 28 GPS Board Software Checksum Failure
st
1 1 29 Unreasonable Alt or Unreasonable Ground Speed or Dup Sat
2 Elevations and Azimuths
30 SSM 01 = Invalid
4 31 SSM 10 = Unused
8 32 Parity Bit
Page 523
34-60-22 1 May 2012
GPS1 2/4 and 3/4 Pages (also applies to GNSS and GLS)
GPS1 2/4
sv# az el snr stat
04 122ø 38ø 54 5
06 93ø 87ø 23 4
29 248ø 11ø 18 2
22 248ø 22ø 26 4
16 223ø 45ø 33 9
13 180ø 02ø 04 7
09 127ø 53ø 34 4
15 35ø 67ø 36 4
RETURN®
GPS1 2/4
GPS1 3/4
sv# az el snr stat
05 22ø 48ø 54 5
07 193ø 57ø 23 4
24 148ø 21ø 18 2
21 241ø 27ø 26 4
26 210ø 35ø 33 9
23 150ø 62ø 04 7
19 237ø 43ø 34 4
11 100ø 07ø 36 4
RETURN®
GPS1 3/4
These pages display the twelve satellites most likely in current use by the GPS. Each line
displays SV# (Satellite Vehicle Number). Azimuth will always be true direction from the
aircraft. Elevation is in degrees above the horizon (90 degrees is directly overhead the aircraft
position). EL may be negative indicating a satellite below the horizon. SNR is a number from
0 to 63 in dB Hz. Status is a number from 0 top 9 and is defined as follows:
GPS SATELLITE STATUS
STATUS DEFINITION
0 Satellite is assigned to a channel
1 FIND command issued
2 Waiting to receive almanac and ephemeris data
3 Waiting to receive complete pseudo range data block
4 Performing the tracking/acquisition process
5 Fast sequencing of satellite signal (tracking mode)
6 Satellite is not assigned to a channel
7 Lost satellite lock during sequencing process
8 Waiting for clock message
9 Satellite not found
Page 524
34-60-22 1 May 2012
GPS1 4/4 Page (also applies to GNSS and GLS)
GPS1 4/4
deselected desel
satellites stat sv#--
5 des
23 des select
17 auto sv#--
8 req
RETURN®
GPS1 4/4
This page displays a list of satellites that have been deselected by the GPS or requested
deselected by the FMS Verify that individual satellites can be deselected and selected
manually by entering the satellite vehicle number in the appropriate filed and then pushing
[ENTER].
Page 525
34-60-22 1 May 2012
5. Troubleshooting
When an FMS fails any of the tests in the checkout section, troubleshoot it per the procedures
below.
Troubleshooting instructions are provided in the following three-column table, in which the
first column lists equipment symptoms or describes the portion of the checkout procedure
that the unit did not pass. These Malfunction/Symptoms are listed in approximately the same
sequence as the checkout procedures. The second column lists probable causes. The third
column describes the corrective action(s) for the malfunction.
After performing the listed corrective action, repeat the failed test to ensure that the problem
has been corrected. Then complete the checkout procedure from the point where it was
interrupted. Should the corrective action affect tests already passed, perform those tests again.
Where more than one corrective action is listed, the first action listed is the most probable
repair that will correct the malfunction. However, when replacement of a major component
such as the FMS is recommended, it is permissible to replace individual circuit boards
instead if personnel are authorized by Universal Avionics Systems Corporation to do so. If
there is more than one corrective action listed and performing the first action does not correct
the problem, perform the next action listed.
NOTE: Ensure that potential causes of trouble have been eliminated before returning the
FMS, FPCDU or other major component for repair. Verify that the installation
wiring is correct. Determine whether the correct input and output voltages are
present. Verify that the required ARINC labels are present on the data busses.
Page 526
34-60-22 1 May 2012
A. Self-Test
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION
The Self-Test Page shows a FAIL May indicate fault in Self-Test. Push [MSG] to display failure
next to one or more of the items information, then troubleshoot
but after a short time, the Self-Test indicated fault.
Page is replaced by the
Initialization Page.
The Self-Test Page shows a FAIL FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
but is not replaced by the
Initialization Page.
CDU MSG indicator does not FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
illuminate.
One or more of the annunciators The annunciator is defective. Troubleshoot annunciator per
does not illuminate during self-test. manufacturer’s instructions.
CRT brightness does not respond FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
properly to dimming feature.
Keyboard brightness cannot be 1. Fault in radio lighting circuit. 1. Repair radio lighting circuit.
controlled by the radio lighting. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace FMS.
Software is not the correct version. FMS has the wrong software Reconfigure or upgrade software.
program.
DEXP is out of date. 1. System date or time is wrong. 1. Enter the correct date and time
2. Wrong database. on Initialization page.
2. Update database per Operator’s
Manual.
Page 527
34-60-22 1 May 2012
B. System Failure Messages
During normal FMS operations, numerous background tests are run continuously to assure
normal operations. Should failures occur, the FMS system will notify the operator with a
flashing message light on the panel or on the associated EFIS display. Pressing the MSG key
will display a message with information about the failure detected. Many failures can be a
result of problems other than the FMS systems components. The following table lists failure
messages that can be displayed by the FMS, their meanings and possible causes / remedies to
assist the maintenance technician with troubleshooting pilot reported failure messages. This
table lists only failure messages, not normal system status messages that are not indicative of
component failures.
Refer to the applicable Operator’s Manual for a complete listing of messages.
System Failure Messages
Failure Message Probable Cause Action/Correction
400 Hz REF FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz AC power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
3. Wiring faults. 3. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
4. Defective FMS. 4. Replace FMS.
ABNORMAL CKLIST DB FAIL The abnormal checklist database Reload checklist database.
has failed.
AFIS ARINC FAILURE The FMS has determined that a Troubleshoot bus and AFIS and
failure is present on the AFIS repair.
ARINC bus.
AHRS # INPUT FAIL The AHRS input has failed or its Troubleshoot AHRS and repair.
status word indicates failure.
A/D CODE # Analog/Digital board failed self Replace FMS.
test.
A/D HEADING FAIL 1. System heading source, A/D 1. Check heading source to FMS,
(synchro analog-to-digital), has switch sources/reset system as
failed. required.
3. Defective FMC. 3. Replace FMS.
ADC INPUT FAIL 1. An Air Data Computer (ADC) 1. Check circuit breakers for Air
failure is detected. Data Computer/ACU if installed.
Select alternate sources if
available.
AFIS VHF MODEM FAILURE The VHF modem in the AFIS DMU Replace AFIS DMU.
has failed
AIRPORT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload Navigation Database
airport section of the standard diskettes.
database.
AIRWAY DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload Navigation Database.
the Airways database.
Page 528
34-60-22 1 May 2012

ALIGN PT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database diskette.
the Align Points database.
ALTITUDE INVALID 1. The altitude portion of the Air 1. Check circuit breakers/status of
Data Computer is unusable. Air Data Computer/ACU if
2. Wiring faults. installed.
3. Defective FMS. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Replace FMS.
ANALOG BOARD FAIL Faults on analog data outputs from Replace analog board.
FMS.
ANALOG INST FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz (AC) power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
APPROACH DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
approach database.
ARPT NAME DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
geographical airport names
database.
ARINC # FAIL 1. Faults in wiring from/to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ARINC inputs/outputs.
ASCB FAIL 1. Faults on ASCB wiring. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ASCB LEFT BUS FAIL The FMS has not detected activity 1. Determine if other systems on
on the left ASB bus for more than the left ASCB bus are operational.
1 second. If not, troubleshoot and repair
ASCB bus.
2. Replace FMS.
ASCB RIGHT BUS FAIL The FMS has not detected activity 1. Determine if other systems on
on the right ASCB bus for more the right ASCB bus are
than 1 second. operational. If not, troubleshoot
and repair ASCB bus.
2. Replace FMS.
AUXILIARY BOARD FAIL 1. Faults on Roll Steering, CSDB 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
or Fuel Flow wiring.
BACKUP DATABASE FAIL A fault in the Database software. Reload FMS Software.
CKLST DATABASES FAIL All checklist databases have Reload checklist database.
hailed.
CLOCK TIMER FAIL The clock timer on the CPU board Replace CPU board.
has failed self test.
COMP ARPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Airport database 1. Reload the Company Airports
has failed error checking. database.
2. Replace FMS.
Page 529
34-60-22 1 May 2012

COMP ROUTE DATABASE FAIL The Company Routes database 1. Reload the Company Routes
has failed error checking. database.
2. Replace FMS.
COMP WPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Waypoints 1. Reload the Company Waypoints
database has failed error database.
checking. 2. Replace FMS.
CONFIG DATA FAILED 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
module.
2. Defective configuration module 2. Troubleshoot configuration
module.
CONFIG MODULE FAILED 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
module.
2. Defective configuration module 2. Troubleshoot configuration
module.
CONFIG UPDATE REQUIRED Configuration module and FMS Reconfigure module to correct
configuration data has failed settings.
requiring the FMS to be configured
for installation.
CREW CKLIST DATABASE FAIL The crew notes database has Reload checklist database.
failed.
CROSSFILL FAIL: BUS 1. Wiring faults in crossfill data 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(Dual or triple installations only) lines between FMS systems.
CSDB SELFTEST FAIL 1. VOR, DME or RTU function may 1. Enable the disabled function.
be disabled.
2. Wiring faults on CSDB data 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
lines from/to FMS.
DATABASE EXPIRED The current date is past the Nav Load current Nav Database
Database expiration date. diskettes.
DATABASE FAIL A part or the entire navigation Reload Nav Database diskettes.
database has failed.
DEMONSTRATION MODE The aircraft identification is Reconfigure system to normal
configured as “DEMO” and sensor mode before flight.
data is simulated internally.
DISCRETE I/O FAIL 1. Faults on wiring to FMS discrete 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
input/output wiring.
DOPPLER FAIL Doppler is selected and has failed. Check status of Doppler sensor
and wiring.
EFIS #n SEL HDG FAIL The FMS has detected that the 1. Verify the MPU/MFD are
CSDB bus from the MPU has gone operational.
inactive or failed. The bus would 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
have had to be active for this 3. Replace FMS.
message to be displayed.
Page 530
34-60-22 1 May 2012

ENROUTES DATABASE FAIL The Navigation Database Reload Nav Database.
containing enroute intersections
has failed
EMERGENCY CKLIST The emergency checklist database Reload checklist database.
DATABASE FAIL has failed.
ERP # FAIL The EFIS radar panel (ERP) Replace the failed ERP.
associated with this FMS has
failed.
FMC BATTERY LOW Defective FMS. Replace FMS.
FMS DATALINK QUEUE FULL Datalink messages are not being Troubleshoot and repair Datalink
sent resulting in a full message system.
queue.
FMS NETWORK COMM FAIL The FMS internally programmed Replace FMS.
Ethernet address has failed. There
is no communication with the DTU.
FMS PART NUMBER MISMATCH The FMS installed has a different Verify correct part number FMS is
part number than the configuration installed. Reconfigure as required.
stored.
FUELFLOW FAIL 1. Defective fuel flow input source. 1. Troubleshoot and repair fuel
This will be indicated if engine is flow input source if necessary.
shut down or flow signal is lost for
four minutes.
2. Faults on fuel flow wiring. 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FUEL FLOW SELF TEST FAIL 1. Faults on fuel flow input ports. 1. Verify configuration is correct.
GLS # CONFIG MODULE FAIL The GLS #n configuration module 1. Troubleshoot configuration
has failed. module wiring.
2. Replace configuration module.
GLS # FAIL The GPS Landing System LRU Troubleshoot and repair the GLS.
has failed
GLS # VDL FAIL The VHF data link board internal to Troubleshoot the GLS.
the GLS LRU has failed.
GNSS # FAIL 1. Defective or inoperative GNSS 1. Check status of GNSS sensor.
sensor.
2. Wiring faults on GNSS input to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FMS.
GPIR # FAILED 1. Defective or inoperative GPIRS 1. Check status of GPIRS sensor.
sensor.
2. Wiring faults on GPIRS input to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FMS.
Page 531
34-60-22 1 May 2012

GPS # FAILED 1. GPS position data is missing or 1. Check status of GPS sensor on
invalid or the status label indicates DATA pages.
a FAIL status exists.
2. GPS antenna coax is damaged 2. Check condition of GPS
or disconnected. antenna/coax and repair as
required.
3. Wiring faults on GPS 3. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
input/output wiring.
4. Defective GPS sensor. 4. Replace GPS sensor. If GPS is
internal to the FMS, replace FMS.
HEADING REF FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz (AC) power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
3. Wiring faults. 3. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
IC600L HEADING FAIL The left heading source has failed Troubleshoot and repair the left
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only) heading source.
IC600R HEADING FAIL The right heading source has 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
failed (Honeywell Primus 1000 right heading source.
only). 2. Replace FMS
IC600-L BUS FAIL The left IC600 bus has failed 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only). Primus 1000 system.
2. Replace the FMS.
IC600-R BUS FAIL The right IC600 bus has failed 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only). Primus 1000 system.
2. Replace the FMS.
INVALID ARINC VERSION Two ARINC boards, which do not Replace the FMS.
have the same software version
numbers, are installed in the FMS.
INVALID CONFIGURATION FMS configuration data is Reconfigure module to correct
incorrect. settings.
INVALID FUEL CONFIG The fuel flow sensor configuration Reconfigure to correct settings.
is invalid or incomplete.
IRS # FAIL 1. An inertial reference system 1. Check status of the IRS system.
failure is detected. Repair or replace IRS as required.
2. Faults in input wiring to the
FMS. 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
IRS # DC FAIL 1. IRS #n backup battery has failed Troubleshoot and repair IRS power
or is below the minimum voltage. source or backup battery.
2. IRS main input power is under
voltage.
Page 532
34-60-22 1 May 2012

LCS FAIL # 1. The message displayed where # 1. Check status of the LCS sensor.
is the failure code for the type
failure the LCS has detected as
follows:
1 = LCS Program Checksum
fail.
2 = LCS ARINC Self-Test Fail.
3 = LCS Memory Test Fail
9 = LCS not communicating with
the FMS.
2. Wiring faults in input wiring to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
the FMS.
LEFT IOC -…FAIL The left input/output concentrator Replace the failed IOC.
(onside or offside) has failed.
MEMORY BANK X FAIL The internal memory bank has Replace the FMS.
failed error checking.
MOT WPT MEMORY FAIL The Mark On Target waypoint Replace the FMS.
memory section has failed power
up and self test.
NAV DATABASES FAILED All of the navigation databases Reload navigation database.
have failed.
NDB DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload navigation database.
NDB database.
NDB NAME DATABASE FAIL An error was detected in the NDB Reload navigation database.
plain language name database.
NEW MAINT LOG EXISTS This message is displayed one Download maintenance log to a
minute after landing when any blank DOS formatted diskette and
diagnostic history event has been view with ASCII text editor for
recorded during the previous flight. analysis.
NONVOLATILE MEMORY FAIL 1. The nonvolatile memory has 1. Recycle power to FMS to
failed the power up test due to attempt to clear. Pilot,
voltage transients corrupting performance and checklist
system RAM. databases will likely be lost and
have to be reloaded as required.
NORMAL CKLIST DATABASE The normal checklist database has Reload checklist database as
FAIL failed (only with Collins Pro Line 4 required.
interface).
OFFSIDE FLAP POS FAILED The offside flap position input to Troubleshoot and repair the flap
the Primus 1000 has failed (LR45 position input to the Primus 1000.
only).
Page 533
34-60-22 1 May 2012

ONSIDE FLAP POS FAILED The onside flap position input to Troubleshoot and repair the flap
the Primus 1000 has failed (LR45 position input to the Primus 1000.
only).
OTHER FMS HEADING FAILED The FMS is using heading from Troubleshoot and repair heading
(dual or triple FMS installations the other FMS and that heading input sources to specified FMS.
only) has failed.
PERF DATABASE FAILED The performance database has Reload performance database.
failed.
PERF DB ID MISMATCH The performance database ID Reload correct performance
entered on the configuration pages database or reconfigure ID code in
does not agree with the configuration module to correct
performance database ID on the data.
disk that is loaded.
PILOT APPR DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined approach
database.
PILOT ARPT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined airport database.
PILOT DATABASES FAILED The database of all pilot defined Reload pilot database.
locations has failed.
PILOT RNWY DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined runway database.
PILOT SID DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined SID database.
PILOT STAR DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined STAR database.
PILOT WPT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined waypoint
database.
n VOLT PWER SUPPLY # FAIL 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(n = 3 VDC, 5 VDC, +8 VDC or module.
–8VDC) 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
PROGRAM CHECK FAIL A fault in the FMS Software. Reload the FMS Software.
PRO LINE 21-L BUS FAIL The left PL-21 bus has failed or is 1. Troubleshoot and repair the Pro
invalid (Collins Pro Line 21 EFIS Line 21 system
only). 2. Replace the FMS.
PRO LINE 21-R BUS FAIL The right PL-21 bus has failed or is 1. Troubleshoot and repair the Pro
invalid (Collins Pro Line 21 EFIS Line 21 system
only). 2. Replace the FMS.
RIGHT IOC-…FAIL The right input/output concentrator Replace the failed IOC.
(onside or offside) has failed.
ROUTES FAIL The route database has failed. Reload pilot database.
Page 534
34-60-22 1 May 2012

RRS DATA BUS FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RRS interface. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
2. Defective RRS. 2. Replace RRS.
RRS (DME, TACAN, VOR) SELF 1. Wiring faults in RRS interface. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
TEST FAIL 2. Defective RRS. 2. Replace RRS.
RRS TUNE BUS FAIL 1. Faults in tune data wiring from 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
FMS to RRS.
RRS (DME, TACAN, VOR) TUNE 1. Faults in tune data wiring from 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
FAIL FMS to RRS.
2. Wiring faults between the RRS 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
and DME, TACAN, and/or VOR.
RTU # FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RTU to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
interface.
2. Defective RTU. 2. Replace RTU.
RUNWAY DATABASE FAIL The runway database has failed. Reload navigation database.
SID DATABASE FAIL The Navigation SID database has Reload navigation database.
failed.
SOFTWARE CONFIG MISMATCH The loaded version of software 1. Reconfigure FMS.
does not match the Software 2. Replace FMS.
Control Number (SCN) stored in
the configuration module.
STAR DATABASE FAIL The Navigation STAR database Reload navigation database.
has failed.
STEERING FAIL 1. Loss of TAS input to the FMS 1. Check TAS output and repair as
This failure may be reset by from the ADC. required.
positioning the cursor over the 2. Faulty wiring on roll steering 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ROLL CMD line on DATA page 5 output from FMS.
(General Data) and then pushing 3. Defective FMS. 3. Replace FMS.
[BACK] and then [ENTER].
SPCL MISSION MEMORY FAIL The special missions memory Replace the FMS.
section has failed power up self
test.
TACAN FAIL Defective TACAN unit. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair
2. Replace TACAN unit.
TAS INVALID 1. Faulty ADC/ACU system. 1. Check ADC/ACU system and
repair as required.
2. Wiring faults in ADC/TAS input 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
to FMS.
TAWS FAIL
TERMINALS DATABASE FULL The terminal intersection database 1. Reload the NAV database.
has failed error checking. Access 2. Replace the FMS.
to data is denied.
Page 535
34-60-22 1 May 2012

UNILINK FAIL 1. Defective UniLink unit. 1. Replace UniLink unit.
VHF NAME DATABASE FAIL The navigation VHF plain Reload navigation database.
language name database has
failed
VHF NAVAID DATABASE FAIL The navigation navaid database Reload navigation database.
has failed.
VOR TUNE FAIL AN ARINC VOR has not tuned the 1. Attempt to tune another VOR
selected frequency. station.
2. Troubleshoot and repair the
ARINC VOR.
3. Replace the FMS.
XFILL CONFIG MISMATCH Crossfill data has been sent to and Verify FMS configuration.
FMS that is not configured to
receive this data. This message
alerts the operator that crossfill
data was sent but not accepted.
Page 536
34-60-22 1 May 2012
C. Database Update Error Messages
The system provides notification of errors that occur during the database update process
which prevent successful completion of the database load procedure.
The system provides notification of errors that occur during the database update process
which prevent successful completion of the database load procedure. The use of the term
“DTU” is used to reference the DTU, DTU-100 or SSDTU and the use of the terms “DISK”
displayed on the FMS and “data storage device” are used to reference floppy disk, Zip disk,
USB or Secure Digital data storage devices.
Trouble Probable Cause Correction
COMMUNICATION ERROR: 1. DTU power interrupted. 1. Restore power to DTU.
DTU STOPPED RESPONDING 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
FMS AND DTU ARE OUT OF 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
SYNC 3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
OPERATION ABORTED BY DTU 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
UNRECOVERABLE ERRORS IN 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
TRANSFERRED DATA 3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
COULD NOT LOAD ALL Attempting to load incorrect Obtain and load correct database.
DATABASES – TOO LARGE FOR database.
AVAILABLE MEMORY
DISK FORMAT ERROR 1. Bad data storage device. 1. Replace data storage device.
2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU. 3. Replace DTU.
DISK IS FULL An attempt is made to write flight Insert a blank formatted data
data to the data storage device storage device.
and there is not enough free space
available.
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED The DTU detects that the data Reset the write protect device on
storage device is write protected. the data storage device.
DISK MUST BE EMPTY USE An attempt is made to do a Pilot Use blank formatted data storage
ANOTHER DISK OR PUSH Database Save and the data device to perform pilot database
FORMAT DISK ON DISK MENU storage device already contains at save function.
TO DELETE ALL FILES ON THIS least one DOS file.
DISK
DISK READ OR WRITE ERROR 1. Bad data storage device 1. Replace data storage device.
2. Electrical noise on DTU data 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
lines.
3. Defective DTU. 3. Replace DTU.
Page 537
34-60-22 1 May 2012

DTU NOT DETECTED 1. DTU is not connected. 1. Check DTU connections and
2. DTU is not turned on and repair as required.
finished with self-test. 2. Turn on the DTU and wait until it
3. Defective DTU. has finished self test.
3. Replace DTU.
EMPTY DISK OR NON-FMS DISK The data storage device does not Use correct data storage device.
contain a header file.
INVALID DATA ON DISK Faulty or incorrect data storage Use correct data storage device.
device.
INVALID DISK VERSION 1. The disk version field in the 1. Verify that FMS configuration
header does not agree with the shows correct SCN.
FMS SCN.
2. Faulty or incorrect data storage 2. Use correct data storage
device. device.
LOAD CANCELLED BY 1. Errors in loading. 1. Cancel and restart load.
ANOTHER FMS 2. Defective FMS. 2. Replace FMS.
LOAD CANCELLED 1. Errors in loading. 1. Cancel and restart load.
MISSING OR UNFORMATTED 1. No data storage device in DTU. 1. Use correct data storage
DISK device.
2. Incorrect type data storage 2. If appropriate format the
device or is not DOS formatted to diskette or use correct diskette.
correct data size.
MUST FIRST UPDATE NAV An attempt is made to load a NAV Load the NAV standard database
DATABASE BEFORE THIS extended database before the first and then load the NAV
EXTENDED OR COMPANY NAV standard database of the extended database.
ROUTE DATABASE CAN BE same cycle is loaded.
LOADED
MUST FIRST UPDATE NAV An attempt is made to load a pilot Update the FMS to the same
DATBASE BEFORE THIS PLT database that is more recent than navigation database cycle used to
DATABASE CAN BE LOADED the one currently stored. create the pilot database. Then
load the pilot database.
POWER FAIL A power failure has interrupted the Reset power and restart the load
operation. as required.
D. Configuration Verification
Data value fails to match the 1. Configuration Module is 1. Reprogram per System Data
corresponding data value on the programmed incorrectly. Installation section in this manual.
Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets. 2. Mount rack or FMS connector 2. Determine fault and replace.
pins, insulation or wiring is
defective.
3. FMS is defective. 3. Replace FMS.
Page 538
34-60-22 1 May 2012
E. FMS Self-Test Output
HSI does not show required 1. Configuration is incorrect. 1. Reprogram.
output. 2. FMS to HSI wiring is incorrect 2. Check and correct wiring (see
Troubleshooting Synchro: Wiring
to Receiver).
3. HSI is defective. 3. Replace HSI.
Flight director does not command 1. FMS to autopilot/flight director is 1. Rewire correctly.
10 degree right bank. incorrect.
2. Flight director is defective. 2. Replace the flight director.
F. FMS Output to HSI

HSI does not show required 1. Configuration is incorrect. 1. Reprogram.
output. 2. FMS to HSI wiring is incorrect. 2. Check and correct wiring (see
Troubleshooting Synchro: Wiring
to Receiver).
3. HSI is defective 3. Replace HSI.
G. DIST/GS
DIST is not counting down or GS FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
(Ground Speed) is not approx. 150
knots.
H. HSI From
HSI does not show FROM 1. HSI is defective. 1. Replace HSI.
indication. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace FMS.
I. DIST/BRG
CDU does not show correct 1. Fault in wiring. 1. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
distance or bearing. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
HSI does not show above values. 1. Fault in wiring. 1. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
2. HSI is defective. 2. Replace HSI.
3. FMS is defective 3. Replace FMS.
Multifunction display (MFD) does 1. Wiring to MFD is incorrect. 1. Check and correct.
not show correct display. 2. MPU is defective. 2. Replace the MPU.
3. MFD is defective. 3. Replace the MFD.
4. FMS is defective. 4. Replace the FMS.
Page 539
34-60-22 1 May 2012
J. Roll Steering
Control yoke does not rotate in 1. FMS to autopilot/flight director 1. Rewire.
specified direction. wiring is reversed.
2. Flight guidance equipment is 2. Check out and correct.
defective.
FMS HDG panel annunciator does 1. Annunciator or its wiring is 1. Repair as required.
not illuminate. defective.
2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
K. Input of a Selected Crosstrack

CDU displays are not as required. FMS is defective. Replace FMS.
MFD display is incorrect. MFD is defective. Take corrective action.
HSI CDI does not deflect as 1. HSI is defective. 1. Replace the HSI.
required. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace the FMS.
L. DME
DME Sensor Status Page does 1. DME sensor or wiring is 1. Determine which and correct.
not show correct distance to DME. defective. 2. Replace FMS.
2. FMS is defective
M. Winds Display
Winds Display on EHSI does not 1. EHSI drive computer is 1. Replace the EHSI drive
agree with that on CDU. defective. computer.
Page 540
34-60-22 1 May 2012
N. Sensors
(1) Checkout of Inertial Sensor Status and Heading Displays
CDU does not show FAILED when FMS is defective. Replace FMS.
ISS is off.
CDU does not show ALIGN when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
MSU is set to Align. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
CDU does not show NAV when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
IRS is in NAV mode. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with IRS is defective. Replace IRS.
the reference heading.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
the HSI HDG 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
(2) Checkout of LORAN C Sensor

LCS display does not show 1. Required LORAN station(s) is 1. Check station maintenance
expected values. off the air. chart in Navigation Systems
section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair the sensor system.
(3) Checkout of Sensor Lat/Long Coordinates vs CDU – Calculated Position

Sensor supplied coordinates do 1. Required VLF station(s) is off 1. Check station maintenance
not agree with CDU calculated the air. chart in Navigation Systems
position. section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair the sensor system.
Page 541
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Navigation Systems
1. Scheduled Maintenance Periods of Navigation Systems
Maintenance periods are subject to change. Information about DGPS and GPS may be
obtained on the Internet at: www.navcen.uscg.gov
Additional information about DGPS and GPS is available from:
703-313-5900
U.S Coast Guard Navigation Center
7323 Telegraph Road
Alexandria, VA 22310-3998
A. DGPS Maintenance Schedules
Differential GPS maintenance schedules are not available.
B. GPS Maintenance Schedules
The Global Positioning System has no scheduled maintenance that affects the availability of
the system.
C. LORAN Maintenance Schedules
The LORAN system has no regular schedule for maintenance of its transmitting stations.
United States coverage was discontinued as of February 2010. This did not affect other parts
of the world; refer to UASC Service Letter SL2832.
Page 601
34-60-22 1 May 2012
Fuel Flow Inputs

1. Fuel Flow Sensors
The FMS accepts up to four fuel flow inputs directly from the engine fuel flowmeter sensors.
Sensor types which may be operated with the FMS include but are not limited to the
following:
I.D.C. fuel flow indicators
Canadian Marconi indicators
Eldec Flowmeter Transmitters
Ragen
X & O Engineering Flowmeter Transmitters
Gull Airborne
Ametek fuel flow indicators
Howell fuel flow indicators
Simmons Precision transmitters
General Electric AC voltage pickoff
Learjet/E.T. Fuel Management Computer (Pulse). All Learjet models
require J.E.T. S.B. #542-1158-7
Learjet DC Fuel Management
Intertechnique Totalizer
NOTE: For information on Aircraft Type vs. Fuel Flowmeter Type Reference Chart and
Fuel Flow Scaling, refer to the FMS Configuration Manual, Report No. 34-60-26.
NOTE: For wiring diagrams, pin assignments and other specific information, refer to the
FMS Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-27.
Page 701
34-60-22 1 May 2012

34-60-22 UNS 1E 1C+ Tech Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

34-60-22 UNS 1E 1C+ Tech Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNS-1E

Super Flight Management System

The information contained herein is subject to Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”),

This publication is available at www.uasc.com.

©2001, 2012 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

3260 East Universal Way

Record of Temporary Changes

1 19 Feb 2013 19 Feb 2013 / UASC

List of Effective Pages

Title Page 1 May 2012 108 1 May 2012

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1 MayPage

229 1 May 2012 350 1 May 2012

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1 MayPage

517 1 May 2012

Navigation Systems 601 1 May 2012

Fuel Flow Inputs 701 1 May 2012

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1 MayPage

Description and Operation

(3) Second ARINC Circuit Board (Optional)

(2) Flash Memory

(1) ERP Radar Controls

Temporary Change No. 34.60.22-1

Conditions DO-160E Category

AIRCRAFT MAKE: ___________________________________________

(2) Enroute Flight Director and Autopilot Operation

B. Compatible Peripheral Equipment

Basic UNS-1E P/N

FMS without GPS = 0

Basic UNS-1C+ P/N

FMS without GPS = 0

Basic Part Number

NOTE: A new faceplate/glass assembly is designated by -XX5 and -XX6 which

Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU-100

K. Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100)

Basic Part Number for Portable DTU-100

L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit

Basic Part Number for Cockpit SSDTU

M. Portable Solid State Data Transfer Unit

Basic Part Number for Portable SSDTU

B. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)

D. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) (P/N 1406-01-X)

E. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)

F. Portable SSDTU (P/N 1409-00-2)

B. 4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit P/N K12026-4

D. Portable Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050-1

F Portable SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-2

1.728 2.279 0.525

REAR VIEW SIDE VIEW

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 8.1 LBS

Install the configuration module as follows

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12026-4

BACK VIEW TOP VIEW

5.750 0.585 3.634

4.500 FUEL FPL

TUNE VNAV 4.370

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

TUNE VNAV 4.370

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

(4) Aft Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX5) MA

AFT MOUNT - SIDE VIEW